Sie sind auf Seite 1von 489

LIST OF FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS – INSTRUMENTATION

(As applicable for Sagar Laxmi Modification Project)

S.No. FS # Description Rev Date Revision

1. 3100 Level Gauge 04-05-2011 4

2. 3101 Level Switch (Pneumatic) 18.02.2008 3

3. 3102 Level Switch (Electrical) 18.02.2008 3

4. 3103 Level Transmitter 30.03.2011 4a

5. 3200 Flow Switch 18.02.2008 2

6. 3201 Flow Totalizer 31.03.2011 4a

7. 3202 Electronic Flow Transmitter 30.03.2011 5a

8. 3203 Orifice Plate Assembly 31.08.2009 4

9. 3204 Restriction Orifice Assembly 18.02.2008 3

10. 3205 Senior Orifice Assembly 27.08.2009 3

11. 3206 Rotameter 18.02.2008 3

12. 3207 Turbine Flow Meter 26.08.2009 4

13. 3208 Coriolis Meter 31.03.2011 4a

14. 3209 MPFM 16.12.2010 4

15. 3210 Gas Flow Computer 18.02.2008 3

16. 3211 Liquid Flow Computer 28.09.2009 4

17. 3212 Ultrasonic Flow Meter 03.05.2010 1a

18. 3213 Electro Magnetic Flow Meter 09.02.2009 1

19. 3300 Temperature Gauge 18.02.2008 4

20. 3301 Temperature Switch (Electrical) 18.02.2008 2

21. 3302 Temperature Transmitter (Electronic) 16.07.2010 3

22. 3400 Differential Pressure Gauge 30.09.2011 5

23. 3401 Pressure Gauge 31.03.2011 5b

24. 3402 Pressure Switch (Electrical) 18.02.2008 2

25. 3403 Pressure Transmitter (Electronic) 30.03.2011 4a

26 3404 Current to Pneumatic Convertor 21.12.2010 0

27. 3500 Fire & Gas Detection System 13.12.2011 4

28. 3501 Shut Down Panel (Pneumatic) 23.09.2010 4

Page 1 of 2
LIST OF FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS – INSTRUMENTATION
(As applicable for Sagar Laxmi Modification Project)

S.No. FS # Description Rev Date Revision

29. 3502 Telemetry Interface Cabinet 31.03.2011 3

30. 3503 Instrumentation for Equipment Package 28.03.2007 1

31. 3506 Hydraulic Power Unit Cum Panel 16.06.2008 1

32. 3507 Bulk item requirements for interfacing 15.05.2008 1

33. 3508 Instt Cables 02-05-2011 2

34. 3509 Sub Sea Intervention Valve Actuator 28.07.2008 1

35. 3510 Sub Sea Umbilical 05.09.2011 1

36. 3511 Electro Hydraulic System (Marginal Fields) 08.12.2011 0

37. 3600 Hi-Lo Pilot Switch 18.02.2008 4

38. 3601 Pressure Indicating Controller 31.03.2011 4a

39. 3602 P / I Converter 18.02.2008 2

40. 3603 Recorder (Electronic) 18.02.2008 2

41. 3604 Recorder (Pneumatic) 18.02.2008 2

42. 3605 Portable Calibrator 18.02.2008 3

43 3606 Filter Regulator 18.02.2008 3

44 3700 Control Valve 23.02.2010 4

45 3701 Safety Relief Valve 14.12.2010 3


Self Actuated Pressure Control Valve
46 3702 15.12.2010 4
(SAPCV)
47 3703 Deluge Valve 18.02.2008 3

48 C100 Distributed Control System 11.07.2007 3

49 C101 Programmable Logic Controller 28.03.2007 1

50 C102 Integrated Control System 06.12.2006 0

51 C103 Telecom System 07.12.2006 0

52 C104 HIPPS 15.06.2010 2

Page 2 of 2
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 2 OF 11

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Level gauge 3
4.1 Gauge type 3
4.2 Material 5
4.3 Accuracy 5
4.4 Reading scales 5
4.5 Enclosure class 5
4.6 Miscellaneous 5
Annexure I Material Selection Chart for Level Gauge 6
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 7-10
Annexure III Data Sheet Format for LG 11

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 3 OF 11

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Level Gauge for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Level gauge suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration,
preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where
required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 LEVEL GAUGE:
4.1 GAUGE TYPE:
4.1.1 The Level Gauge may be transparent type / Reflex type / Magnetic Float type
depending on the nature of process fluid, for physical measurement of the level
in the vessel / tanks.
4.1.2 General:
4.1.2.1 Level indicator in hydrocarbon services shall be a transparent type for turbid /
dirty Liquids and Reflex type for clear liquids.
4.1.2.2 For level measurement greater than two meter, a differential type pressure
instrument shall be used.
4.1.2.3 Process connections shall be side and side or top and bottom ¾”NPT as per
process requirement. LG bottom connection shall not be located at the bottom of
the vessel on or near the exit / drain of the vessel / equipment, as it may cause
erroneous display of level on account of the velocity of the draining liquid.
4.1.2.4 Level instruments for pressure and non- pressure storage tanks, Large vessels
where measurement is not for accounting purpose, may be by differential head
measurement or by a float type level gauge with local indication at grade level(
for tank level gauge) and provision for remote indication and alarms.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 4 OF 11

4.1.2.5 All flanges on the level instrument pressure retaining parts shall be of the same
type and rating as the process flanges, and shall be in accordance with the vessel
trim specification.
4.1.2.6 Float type level gauges shall comprise of a simple float magnetically coupled
with the indicator assembly.
4.1.2.7 The drain valve from all level instruments shall be piped / tubed into the platform
drains system. All level instruments in toxic and hydrocarbon service shall have
blow down connections to closed drain / safe venting place.
4.1.2.8 Each Level gauge shall be hydro tested to a pressure of 1.5 times the design/max/
process pressure. The manufacturer before shipment shall perform calibration and
alignment of all instruments.
4.1.3 Gauge Glasses
4.1.3.1 Gauge Glasses shall be provided on all vessels except product storage tanks, to
cover the complete operating range of level including the spans of level
transmitters and level alarm switches.
4.1.3.2 Reflex gauge glasses of the high-pressure type shall be used for gas-liquid
interfaces where the liquid is clean and colorless.
4.1.3.3 Transparent or thru vision gauges shall be used for liquid-liquid interfaces,
distillates heavier than 250 API gravity, all-crude and residues. Interface gauges
shall be connected directly to the vessel without gauge columns. Transparent
gauge glasses shall be back-lighted with gauge illuminators. Each Illuminator
shall have power isolation switch.
4.1.3.4 Gauge glasses shall have one or more sections of approximately 302 mm (11-
7/8") visible length with top and bottom connection. A maximum of five sections
shall be used for a single gauge. Where more than one gauge is required, they
shall overlap a minimum of 25 mm (1") of visible length.
4.1.3.5 Standard velocity check gauge-cocks shall be furnished with all gauge glasses.
They shall be the offset type with bolted bonnet, ¾” male unions at valve seat-and
gauge connections. Stem shall have hand wheels and quick closing thread with
double seated plunger to permit repacking cock in service and with tip on plunger
to unseat ball check before cock is closed.
4.1.3.6 Gauge glass assemblies shall be chosen for the design pressure and temperature
of the respective vessel.
4.1.3.7 Multiple gauge glasses installation may be mounted on a single pipe column with
block valves at the vessel. Multiple gauge glasses installations shall be
adequately supported so as to prevent strain on gauge valves and nozzles.
4.1.3.8 A block valves shall be installed between the gauge valve and source of fluid to
permit removal of the gauge glass.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 5 OF 11

4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for Level Gauge shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart provided in
Annexure I of this specification.
4.2.2 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid
and ambient conditions to which they are exposed.
4.2.3Body and cover plate shall be SS316. Bolts and nuts shall be SS316. The glass shall
be toughened borosilicate (Klinger or equivalent) which is resistant to thermal and
mechanical shocks. Ball checks plunger seat and valve stem shall be type SS 316.
Drain connection shall be ½” NPT and shall be provided with a SS 316 drain valve.
Wherever necessary, higher-grade material suitable to the process conditions shall be
used. Vent connection shall be ½” NPT on top of each gauge glass. Vent valve with
blind flange shall be provided with top connection. Drain connections shall be piped to
drip pans or deck drains.
4.3 Resolution: “Resolution of the markings on the gage shall be ±2mm.
4.4 Reading Scales: Units for level indicating scales shall be 0-100 percent. (For tanks,
it can be the measure of the height of the tank in the resolution desired) suitable least
count
4.5 Enclosure Class: The level gauge shall be weather proof to IP 65 for electrical
enclosure.
4.6 Miscellaneous:
Nameplate: In addition to the requirements mentioned in the Instrument Design
Criteria 3.6.6.1, the level gauge shall have “stamped” on its SS name plate the
following details:
• Tag Number
• Manufacturer’s Name and Trade Mark
• Gauge type and Model Number
• Material of construction and Pressure Rating
• C/C distance / Measuring range.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 6 OF 11

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Level Gauge.

CHAMBER
COCK COCK
S. No. Piping Class &HAND
BODY TRIM
WHEEL.

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1, PD1,
PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2, XG1, A1H,
1 A3, B3, A8 SS316 SS316 SS316

2 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS316 SS316 SS316

3 A5 MONEL MONEL MONEL


K 500 K 500 K 500

4 A7 Titanium Titanium Titanium.

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N, PA1N, SS316L SS316L SS316L
5
PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N (NACE) (NACE) (NACE)

6 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS316L SS316L SS316L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11, PD11, MONEL-


7 MONEL- 400 MONEL-400
PE11, PF11 400

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 7 OF 11

ANNEXURE – II
HOOK UP DRAWING

LEVEL GAUGE CONNECTION TOP AND BOTTOM

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 8 OF 11

(Hook Up Drawing)

LEVEL GAUGE ( ON STAND PIPE)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 9 OF 11

LIST OF ITEMS.

CODE DESCRIPTION SIZE ENDS QTY UNIT

7 NIPPLE ½” THXPL 02 Nos

10 NIPPLE ¾” THXPL 02 Nos

39 GLOBE VALVE ½” SW 01 No

46 FLANGE ¾” TH 04 Nos
For ¾”FL
62 GASKET 02 Nos
½”
51 CAP TH 02 Nos

72 STUDS &NUTS For ¾”FL 02 Set.

DISPLACER LEVEL INSTRUMENT

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 10 OF 11

(SIDE -SIDE CONNECTION)

LIST OF ITEMS.

CODE DESCRIPTION SIZE ENDS QTY UNIT

7 NIPPLE ½” THXPL 2 Nos

17 SWAGE ¾” X ½” THXPL 2 Nos


NIPPLE
½”
39 GLOBE SW 2 Nos
VALVE
½”
51 CAP TH 2 Nos

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3100
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “LEVEL GAUGE” Page: 11 OF 11

ANNEXURE – III (Typical Data sheet format)


UNITS: Flow→ Liquid M3/Hr Gas→ M3/Hr Steam → Kg/Hr Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G Temp→ 0C Level / Length→ MM
1 ITEM NUMBER
2 TAG NUMBER
GENERAL
3 SERVICE

4 UPPER FLUID
5 LOWER FLUID
SERVICE COND 6 PRESS - OPER / MAX
7 TEMP - OPER / MAX

8 TYPE
9 VISIBLE LENGTH mm
10 NOS. OF SECTIONS
11 CENTRE TO CENTRE DISTANCE mm
LEVEL GAUGE 12 CONNECTION SIZE & RATING
13 CONNECTION LOCATION
14 BODY MATERIAL
15 CHAMBER BODY MATERIAL
16 GLASS TYPE

17 BODY MATERIAL
18 TRIM MATERIAL
19 VESSEL CONN & TYPE
20 GAUGE CONN & TYPE
21 TYPE
22 BALL CHECK
GAUGE COCK
23 RENEWABLE SEATS
24 BONNET
25 SCREW - INSIDE / OUTSIDE
26 CLOSING - PLAIN / QUICK
27 MINIMUM RATING

28 ILLUMINATORS
29 ILLUMINATOR D ETAILS
30 MICA SHIELD
31 HEATING CHAMBER
ACCESS-ORIES 32 COOLING CHAMBER
33 NON-FROSTING TYPE
34 CALIBRATED SCALE
35 GAUGE - VENT
36 GAUGE - DRAIN
37 IBR CERTIFICATION
MISC. 38 MODEL NUMBER
39 MANUFACTURER
Notes :

□ DEVIATION □ NO DEVIATION

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 21.07.2010
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 1 of 8

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR LEVEL SWITCH

(PNEUMATIC)

TOTAL
REVIEWED APPROVED
PREPARED No. OF DATE REV. No.
BY BY
PAGES
VS RS GRP 8 18.02.2008 3
ET RS GRP 12 28.03.2007 2
ET MC RK 12 23.06.2005 1
AK MC AC 12 17.04.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 2 of 8

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Level Switch (Pneumatic) 3
4.1 Switch type 3
4.2 Material 4
4.3 Enclosure 4
4.4 Miscellaneous 4
Annexure I Material Selection Chart for Level Switch 5
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 6
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 3 of 8

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Level Switch (Pneumatic) for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Level Switch suitable for
its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration,
preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where
required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 LEVEL SWITCH:
4.1 Level switch may be externally mounted float or displacer type.
4.1.1 General:
4.1.1.1 All level instruments in toxic and hydrocarbon service shall have blow down
connections to closed drain.
4.1.1.2 Rotatable heads shall be provided with displacer/float type instruments.
Shutdown devices may be externally mounted float or displacer type.
4.1.1.3 External float or displacer level cages to have 1 ½ " connections. The float or
displacer shall be removable / replaceable. Liquid interface level switches shall
be displacer type.
4.1.1.4 Top-mounted/side-mounted internal displacer instruments shall have stilling well
of same diameter as the vessel nozzle, in order to restrict horizontal movement of
the displacer.
4.1.1.5 Air filter regulator shall be provided for each level switch. Regulator shall be
provided with an output gauge having 0-6 Kg/cm2 range.
4.1.1.6 All shutdown and alarm switches shall be fail safe and abnormal condition shall
cause a loss in output signals for pneumatic instruments.
4.1.1.7 Out put shall remain at 3.5 Kg/Cm2 between High and Low settings and 0
otherwise. Process connection shall be as per the approved P&ID.
4.1.1.8 The switch element shall be selected in such a way that it can withstand an over-
range pressure of 1.5 times maximum range without loss of calibration.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 4 of 8

4.1.1.9 Connection for air or gas supply, transmission and control signals shall normally
be internally threaded ¼” NPT.
4.1.1.10 Level switches, float or displacer-operated, shall be actuated mechanically for
switch operation. Head or pressure operated level switches shall be calibrated as
required. Each switch shall be hydro tested to a pressure of 1.5 times the max
process pressure. The manufacturer before shipment shall perform calibration
and alignment of all instruments.
4.1.1.11 External Cage Type Instruments:
4.1.1.11.1 External cage level instruments shall have pressure ratings equal to or greater
than the relevant piping classification for flanged valves.
4.1.1.11.2 Connection for external cages shall be minimum DN50 flanged.
4.1.1.11.3 A positive seal shall be used in transferring float / displacer motion to the
external mechanism where a float or displacer element is employed.
4.1.1.11.4 All external cage instruments shall be designed to permit rotation of the head,
torque tube and transmitter or switch case in relation to the cage / well portion.
4.1.1.11.5 The standard configuration for external cages shall be side and side.
4.1.1.11.6 All external cages shall be fitted with vent and drain and test connections
normally of ¾” NPTF.
4.1.1.12 Displacement Type Instruments:
4.1.1.12.1 Displacement type level instruments shall be of the externally mounted type.
4.1.1.12.2 Displacer chambers for external displacers shall have minimum DN50 ANSI
300 RF flanged vessel connections.
4.1.1.12.3 ‘Side and Bottom’ connections shall be used with ring type joints or similar
connections. Side and top connections shall be used only in cases where this
would avoid a pocket in the connecting piping (on small vessels).
4.1.1.12.4 Connection for internal displacer shall be DN 100 flanged, unless otherwise
specified and approved by the Company.
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for Level switch shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart provided
in Annexure I of this specification.
4.2.2 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid
and ambient conditions to which they are exposed.
4.3 Enclosure Class: The Level switch shall be weather proof to IP 65 or better.
4.4 Miscellaneous: For Level Instruments, especially Switches, the bottom connection
shall not be located at the bottom of the vessel, on or near the exit / drain of the
vessel / equipment, as it may cause erroneous signals of “LSLL/LSL” on account
of the velocity of the draining liquid.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 5 of 8

ANNEXURE – I
Material Selection Chart for level switch

S. No. Piping Class BODY DISPL/FLOAT

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1,


PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2,
1 XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8 CS SS316
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE CS MONEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS316 SS316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

5 A7 CS SOLID TEFLON

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N, PA1N,


6 PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS316 SS316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS316L SS316L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11,


8 PD11, PE11, PF11
MONEL-400 MONEL 400

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 6 of 8

ANNEXURE – II
(Hook Up Drawing)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 7 of 8

ANNEXURE – II
(Hook Up Drawing)
ANNEXURE – II (Contd.)

LEVEL SWITCH (PNEUMATIC


DETAIL - 2

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3101
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 (Pneumatic) Page # 8 of 8

ANNEXURE – III: TYPICAL DATA SHEET


o
UNITS: Flow-> Liquid- m*3/hr Gas- Nm*3/hr Steam- kg/hr Pressure- > kg/cm*2 G Temperature-> C Level/Length-> mm
1. Tag. No.
General 2. Quantity
3. Service
4. Area Classification
5. Internal / external
6. Interface
7. Case Material
8. C/C – Distance
9. Conn. Size & Rating
10. Location Upper
11. Location Lower
Cage
12. Case Orientation
13. Rotatable Head
14. Finned Extension
Drain Conn.
15. Vent
Size
Case to head flange size &
16.
rating
17. Displacer or Float
18. Diameter Length mm.
19. Insertion Depth mm.
20. Displacer Extension mm
Displacer Or Float 21. Displacer or Float Material
Displacer or Float Stem
22.
Material
23. Spring/Torque Tube Material
24. Function
25. Output
26. Control Modes
27. Differential
28. Controller Action
29. Elect. Area Classification
30. Enclosure Material
31. Area Classification
Functional Data 32. Power Supply
33. Switch Type
34. Qty. Form
35. Contact Rating
36. On Level Inc. O/P
37. On Level Dec. Contact
38. Cable Entry
39. Upper Liquid
40. Lower Liquid
41. Sp. Gr. Upper Lower
Service Conditions 42. Press. Nor. Max.
43. Viscosity-Upper Lower
44. Temp. C Nor. Max.
45 Manufacturer
46. Model No.
Others
47. P & ID No.
48. IBR Certification
NOTE :-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 1 of 8

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

LEVEL SWITCH

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE REV. No.
REVISED BY BY
PAGES
VS RS GRP 9 18.02.2008 3
ET RS GRP 12 28.03.2007 2
ET MC RK 12 23.06.2005 1
AK MC AC 12 17.04.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 2 of 8

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Level Switch (Electrical) 3
4.1 Switch type 3
4.2 Material 5
4.3 Accuracy 5
4.4 Reading scales 5
4.5 Enclosure class 5
4.6 Miscellaneous 5
Annexure I Material Selection Chart 6
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 7
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 3 of 8

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Level Switch for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in
the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Level Switch suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration,
preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where required
for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in conjunction with
the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 LEVEL SWITCH (ELECTRICAL):
4.1 Switch Type:
4.1.1 Electrical type.
4.1.2 General:
4.1.2.1 The switch mechanism shall be a hermetically sealed micro-switch of 2 x SPDT, snap
action type. DPDT may be considered instead of 2 X SPDT.
4.1.2.2 Dual magnetic systems shall be used for all level switches, which use magnetic switch
mechanisms.
4.1.2.3 The switch shall be provided with 2Nos. ½”NPT (F) cable entries. One cable entry
shall be plugged with suitable explosion-proof plug.
4.1.2.4 Arcing during making or breaking of switch contacts shall be minimum. The switch
contacts shall have long life and minimum wear. The material chosen for switch
contact shall have good thermal conductivity for dissipating heat.
4.1.2.5 There shall be minimum bounce during making and breaking of switch contacts and
switch mechanism shall be designed to minimize the vibration.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 4 of 8

4.1.2.6 The switch element shall be selected in such a way that it can withstand an over-range
pressure of 1.5 times maximum range without loss of calibration.
4.1.2.7 Level switches shall be heavy duty, with user adjustable set point . Adjustments shall
be tamper-proof.
4.1.2.8 The Level-sensing element shall be designed to meet a service life of one million
switching cycles.
4.1.2.9 Vendor shall ensure that set point falls between 35% and 70% of adjustable range of
the selected model in general.
4.1.2.10 The primary type of level instrument for level switches shall be float type. Level
displacer and float instruments shall be external chamber type. Solid displacers are
preferred to hollow displacers, especially in high-pressure services.
4.1.2.11 The drain valve from all level instruments shall be piped into the platform drains
system.
4.1.2.12 All flanges on the level instrument pressure retaining parts shall be of the same type
and rating as the process flanges, and shall be in accordance with the vessel trim
specification.
4.1.2.13 The collapse pressure of hollow displacers and floats shall be entered on the
instrument data sheet, and marked on the instrument nameplate.
4.1.2.14 The primary type of level instrument for remote transmission shall be displacer type.
4.1.2.15 All switches shall be Ex d.
4.1.2.16 External Cage Type Instruments:
4.1.2.1.15.1 External cage level instruments shall have pressure ratings equal to or greater than
the relevant piping classification for flanged valves.
4.1.2.1.15.2 Connection for external cages shall be minimum DN50 flanged.
4.1.2.1.15.3 A positive seal shall be used in transferring float / displacer motion to the external
mechanism where a float or displacer element is employed.
4.1.2.1.15.4 All external cage instruments shall be designed to permit rotation of the head, torque
tube and transmitter or switch case in relation to the cage / well portion.
4.1.2.1.15.5 The standard configuration for external cages shall be side and side.
4.1.2.1.15.6 All external cages shall be fitted with vent and drain and test connections normally
of ¾” NPTF.
4.1.2.17 Displacement Type Instruments:
4.1.2.17.1 Displacement type level instruments shall be of the externally mounted type.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 5 of 8

4.1.2.17.2 Displacer chambers for external displacers shall have minimum DN50 ANSI 300
RF flanged vessel connections.
4.1.2.17.3 ‘Side and Bottom’ connections shall be used with ring type joints or similar
connections. Side and top connections shall be used only in cases where this would
avoid a pocket in the connecting piping (on small vessels).
4.1.2.17.4 Connection for internal displacer shall be DN 100 flanged, unless otherwise
specified and approved by the Company.
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for Level switch shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart provided in
Annexure I of this specification.
4.2.2 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid and
ambient conditions to which they are exposed.
4.3 Accuracy: The maximum error shall not exceed 1% of the span. Repeatability shall be
±1%.
4.4 Reading Scales: Units for level switch shall be in mm.
4.5 Enclosure Class: In addition to weatherproof, the switch enclosure shall be explosion-
proof to NEMA-7 and certified by third party agencies like UL/FM/BASEEFA or equal
for use in hazardous area (CL 1,DIV.1, GR.D). A warning label which reads
(EXPLOSION PROOF INSTRUMENT, ISOLATE ELSEWHERE BEFORE
OPENING”, shall be affixed on pressure switches which are certified as explosion
proof.
4.6 Miscellaneous:
The switches shall be provided with SS name plate indicating the following:
• Tag Number
• Manufacturer’s Name and Model Number
• Adjustable range
• Element material
• Enclosure classification.
4.6.1 For Level Instruments, especially Switches, the bottom connection shall not be
located at the bottom of the vessel on or near the exit / drain of the vessel / equipment,
as it may cause erroneous display of level on account of the velocity of the draining
liquid.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 6 of 8

ANNEXURE – I

MATERIAL SELCTION CHART

Level Instrument
S. No. Piping Class
Body Displacer / Float

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1,


PB1, PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2,
1 CARBON STEEL SS 316
D2, E2, XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE CARBON STEEL MONEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS 316 SS 316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

5 A7 CARBON STEEL SOLID TEFLON

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N,


6 SS 316 SS 316
PA1N, PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS 316 L SS 316 L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11,


8 MONEL 400 MONEL 400
PB11, PD11, PE11, PF11

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Functional Specifications Spec No : 3102
For Rev. No : 3
Engg. Services
LEVEL SWITCH Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
(ELECTRICAL) Page: 7 of 8

ANNEXURE – II
(Hook Up Drawing)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3102
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai LEVEL SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9000: 2000 (Electrical) Page # 8 of 8

ANNEXURE – III
(TYPICAL DATA SHEET FOR LEVEL SWITCH –Electrical Type)

o
UNITS: Flow-> Liquid- m*3/hr Gas- Nm*3/hr Steam- kg/hr Pressure- > kg/cm*2 G Temperature-> C
Level/Length-> mm

1. Tag. No.
General 2. Quantity
3. Service
4. Area Classification
5. Internal / external
6. Interface
7. Case Material
8. C/C – Distance
9. Conn. Size & Rating
10. Location Upper
11. Location Lower
Case 12. Case Orientation
13. Rotatable Head
14. Finned Extension
15. Vent Drain Conn. Size
16. Case to head flange size & rating
17. Displacer or Float
18. Diameter Length mm.
19. Insertion Depth mm.
20. Displacer Extension mm
Displacer
Or Float 21. Displacer or Float Material
22. Displacer or Float Stem Material
23. Spring/Torque Tube Material
24. Function
25. Output
26. Control Modes
27. Differential
28. Controller Action
29. Elect. Area Classification
30. Enclosure Material
31. Area Classification
Functional 32. Power Supply
Data 33. Switch Type
34. Qty. Form
35. Contact Rating
36. On Level Inc. O/P
37. On Level Dec. Contact
38. Cable Entry
39. Upper Liquid
40. Lower Liquid
41. Sp. Gr. Upper Lower
Service
42. Press. Nor. Max.
Conditions
43. Viscosity-Upper Lower
44. Temp. C Nor. Max.
45 Model No.
Others 46. P & ID No.
47. IBR Certification

NOTE:-

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 2 OF 11

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Level Transmitter 3
4.1 General 3
4.2 Displacement Type Level Transmitter 3
Differential Pressure Type Level
4.3 4
Transmitter
Radar Type Level Transmitter for
4.4 4
Separator
4.5 Material 4
4.6 Accuracy 5
4.7 Output Signal 5
4.8 Reading scales 5
4.9 Display 5
4.10 Enclosure Class 5
Annexure I Material Selection Chart 6
Annexure II Hook-up drawing (2 Sheets) 7
Annexure III Data Sheets (3 Sheets) 9

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 3 OF 11

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Level Transmitter for the intended service.
2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation & Process Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Instrument & Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements
indicated in the Basic Bid Work and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Level Transmitter suitable
for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and
assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site.
4.0 SMART TYPE LEVEL TRANSMITTERS:
4.1 General:
4.1.1 The Level transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and certified by statutory body
like UL/FM/BASEEFA/CMRI/DGMS or equivalent.
4.1.2 All level instruments shall be provided with piping isolation valves
4.1.3 ‘Universal Hand Held Configurator’ shall be supplied for transmitters’
calibration. The number of the calibrator shall be two per Process platform & one
per Well platform. For Radar type level transmitter separate
configurator/calibrator shall be provided.
4.1.4 All vent and drains of the transmitter/tubing/valve manifolds shall be routed to
open drain header. If the instrument is on sour service and harmful fluids like
chemical etc. then it will be routed to close drain header.
4.2 Displacement Type Level Transmitter:
4.2.1 Displacement type level instruments shall be used for all process control
applications where level variation in the vessel is not beyond 1219 mm (48").
Displacer length shall be selected to fully utilize the surge capacity of the vessel.
External displacer cages, segregated from the vessel by two block valves, shall be
used. External cage level instruments shall have pressure ratings equal to or
greater than the relevant piping classification requirements for flanged block
valves on the vessel.
4.2.2 External displacer cages shall be supplied with side/side connections. Where this
is not possible top/bottom or side/bottom connections may be provided. Side / top
connections shall be used only in cases where this would avoid a pocket in the
connecting pipe. Connections for external cages shall be 2” ANSI flanged.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 4 OF 11

4.2.3 Rotatable heads shall be provided with displacer type instruments.


4.2.4 The torque tube material shall be Inconel. The cage to head connection shall be
flanged.
4.2.5 For external cages, block valves shall be installed in horizontal position of both
lines at the vessels. If a vertical nozzle is used the valve shall be arranged so that
no sediment pockets are present. A valve shall be installed to permit draining
each displacer cage and piped to drip pans or deck drains.
4.2.6 A positive seal shall be used in transferring float / displacer motion to the external
mechanism where a float or displacer element is employed.
4.3 Differential Pressure Type Level Transmitters:
4.3.1 Differential pressure type level transmitters may be used in case of fluid of
constant Specific Gravity.
4.3.2 Differential pressure type level measurement is acceptable for remote level
indication. For level range of 1219 mm (48") and above, this type of transmitter
shall be used for all services; seals shall be provided as required. These
instruments shall have zero elevation/ suppression adjustment wherever required.
4.4 Radar Type Level Transmitters for Separator:
4.4.1 As per the Scope of Work requirement Guided Wave Radar Type Level
Transmitter shall be used for Separator.
4.4.2 Principle of the measurement of the transmitter shall be TDR (Time Domain
Reflectometry).
4.4.3 The Transmitter shall be with microprocessor based electronics
4.4.4 The level measurement shall be independent of density, conductivity, viscosity,
temperature, pressure, turbulence, vibration, bubbling etc.
4.4.5 Response Time:<1 Sec
4.4.6 The probe (dimension, material, installation criteria) shall be suitably selected as
per the process condition (dielectric constant, upper product thickness etc.).
4.4.7 For the interface measurement coaxial type probe shall be used in bypass/ stilling
well.
4.4.8 It shall have the zero span adjustment facility
4.4.9 It shall have 1/2” NPT cable entry.
4.4.10 The LT shall cover the full range of measurement.
4.4.11 Detail drawing (GAD) including the fitment and installation of the transmitter
with the separator and the technical specification shall be submitted as a part of
PS.
4.5 Material:
4.5.1 The material requirements for level transmitters / instruments shall in general be
according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria , the material
selection chart provided in Annexure I of this specification and FS-2004A for
Piping Design (2008) & Piping Material Specification.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 5 OF 11

4.5.2 All wetted parts shall be suitable for intended process application.
4.5.3 The cage material shall be compatible with the vessel material, and shall be
Carbon Steel as a minimum. Flange material for external cages shall be Carbon
Steel as a minimum.
4.5.4 All flanges on the level instrument pressure retaining parts shall be of the same
type and rating as the process flanges and shall be in accordance with the vessel
trim specification.
4.5.5 Torque tube when used shall be of Inconel / Monel minimum, with nylon bushing
type bearings. All other wetted parts shall be SS 316 minimum, unless otherwise
specified.
4.6 Accuracy:
4.6.1 For Displacer Type / DP Type Level Transmitter: The maximum error shall not
exceed ±0.5% of the span .
4.6.2 For Radar Type Level Transmitter: ± 3mm(Liquid Level) and ± 10mm(Interface
measurement) or better.
4.7 Output Signal:
4.7.1 Output signal shall be 2 wired 4-20 mA DC, and capable of delivering the rated
current signal into external load of around 600 ohms when powered with nominal
24V DC (negative earthed).
4.7.2 Transmitters shall have HART protocol for communication for remote calibration
and diagnostics from HART maintenance system
4.8 Reading Scales:
Units for level indicating scales shall be 0 – 100 percent.
4.9 Display:
LCD Type, Local/ Integral with the transmitter head or Remote Display. The
Transmitter shall be configurable in engineering units.
4.10 Enclosure Class:
The transmitter shall be weatherproof (IP 65 or better). In addition the LT
enclosure shall be as per Clause no 3.6.4.4.5 of Instrument Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 6 OF 11

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Level Transmitters

Level Instrument
S. No. Piping Class
Body Displacer / Float
A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1,
PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2,
1 XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8 CARBON STEEL SS 316
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE CARBON STEEL MONEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS 316 SS 316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

CARBON STEEL
SOLID TEFLON
5 A7 TEFLON LINED

** A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N,


6 PA1N, PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS 316 SS 316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS 316 L SS 316 L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11,


8 PD11, PE11, PF11
MONEL 400 MONEL 400

[** All Process wetted parts shall be NACE MR-01-75 (Latest Edition ) as minimum ]

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 7 OF 11

ANNEXURE – II

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 8 OF 11

ANNEXURE – II
(Hook Up Drawing)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 9 OF 11

ANNEXURE – III (Page 1)


DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (dP Type)
UNITS: Flow→ Liquid M3/Hr Gas→ M3/Hr Steam → Kg/Hr Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G Temp→ 0C Level / Length→ MM
1. Function: - 24. Service: -
2. Type: - 25. Element: -
3. Case: - 26. Body Material: -
4. Mounting: - 27. --
5. Enclosure: - 28. Process Conn.: -
Enclosure Class: - Process Conn. Loch. : -
6. Elec. Area Class: - 29. Diaphragm Seal:
Type: -
7. Intrinsically Safe: - Wetted Parts Matl: -
Other Material: -
8. Air Supply: - Process Conn.: -
Size Rating: -
9. Power Supply: - Facing & Finish: -
Capillary Material: -
10. Cable Entry: - Armour Flexible: -
Armour Matl. -
11. Accuracy: - Capillary Length: -
12 Repeatability: - Flush Filling Conn with Plug
TRANSMITTER MISCELANEOUS
13 Output: - 30. Static Pressure Rating: -
14. Trans. Power Supply: - 31. Options: -
. CONTROLLER a) 3-Valve Manifold
15. Output: - b) Integral Orifice
16. A/M Switch: - No. of Position: - c) Air Filter Regulator
17. Set Point Adjustment: - d) Intrinsically safe output meter
18. Manual Regulator: - e) Mounting Bracket for 2” N.B. Pipe mounting
control racks .
19. Node: -
RECORDER CONTROL NODES
20. Chart: - P : Proportional %
21. Chart Drive: - I : Integral rep/min
22. Moving Parts Matl.: - D : Derivative rep/min
23. Chart Speed: -
Diff. Range Zero
Zero ELEV. Max. Max. Control Options
Tag No. ELEV. Service
Span Set Mm H2O Press. Temp. Action
Mm H2O

NOTES:

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 10 OF 11

ANNEXURE-III ( Page 2)
DISPLACER TYPE LEVEL TRANSMITTER
UNITS: Flow→ Liquid M3/Hr Gas→ M3/Hr Steam → Kg/Hr Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G Temp→ 0C Level / Length→ MM
1. Tag No.
2. Service
General 3. Internal / External
4. Interface
5. Body or Cage Material
6. Flange Material
7. Conn. Size Type & Rating
8. Flange Facing & Finish
9. Location Upper
Body / Cage 10. Location Upper
11. Case Orientation
12. Rotatable Head
13. Finned Extension
14. Vent Drain Conn. Size
15.
16. Displacer or Float
17. Diameter Or Length mm.
18. Insertion Depth mm.
Displacer or 19. Displacer Extension mm.
Float 20. Displacer Or Float Material
21. Spring / Torque Tube Material
22.
23. Function
24. Output
25. Control Modes
26. Differential
27. Controller Action
28. Elec. Area Classification
Trans. / 29. Elec. Power Or Air Supply
Controller / 30. Switch Type
Switch 31. Qty. Form
32. Contact Rating
33. On Level Inc. Contact
34. On Level Dec. Contact
35. Cable Entry Single / Dual
36. Enclosure
37. Intrinsically Safe
38. Filter Regulator with Gauge
39. Jacketing – Medium Conn.
Option 40. -Temp. C Press
41. Torque Tube Flushing Conn.
42. Intrinsically. Safe Weather Pr. / Pmete
43.
44. Upper Liquid
45. Lower Liquid
Service 46. Sp. Gr. Upper Lower
Conditions 47. Press. Nor Max.
48. Temp. C – Nor. Max.
49. Model No.
50.
51. IBR Certification
NOTES:
VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3103
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 11 OF 11

ANNEXURE-III (Page 3)
RADAR TYPE LEVEL TRANSMITTER
1. Tag No.
2. Service
GENERAL 3. Line Number/ Equipment No.
4. P&ID No.
5. Area Classification
6. Upper Fluid
7. Lower Fluid
8. Density: (Kg/m3) Upper Lower
9. Pressure: Op. Max.
10. Temperature: Op. Max.
SERVICE COND. 11. Design Pressure
12. Design Temperature
13. Die Electric Constant Upper Lower
14. Type
EQUIPMENT 15. Internal Diameter / Height
16. Type
17. Principle
18. Range
SENSOR 19. Probe Type
20. Probe Length
21. Probe Material
22. Probe Submerging Cond. Fully/ Partially
23. Mounting
24. End Connection: Material
25. Internal/ External
26. Interface
27. Cage Material
28. Center to Center Distance: (mm)
29. End Connection: Size Rating
30. Location: Upper Lower
CAGE 31. Rotatable Head
32. Connection Size & Type: Vent Drain
33. Cage to Head : Flange Size Rating
34. Cable Entry Single / Dual
35. Location:
36. Type
37. Output
38. Accuracy
39. Repeatability
40. Resolution
TRANSMITTER &
INDICATOR 41. Housing Material
42. Enclosure
43. Environmental Protection
44. Galvanic Isolation
45. Power Supply
46. Cable Entry
47. Cable Gland
48. Set Point
49. Approvals/ Certifications
OPTIONS 50. LCD Display Location
51. Make
52. Model No.
NOTES:
VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/007 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
Design Division Spec # 3200
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai FLOW SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 1 of 4

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

FLOW SWITCH

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED REV.
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE
REVISED BY BY No.
PAGES
VS RS GRP 4 18.02.2008 2
ET RS GRP 6 28.03.2007 1
ET MC AC 6 13.05.2003 0

ISO -FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3200
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai FLOW SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 2 of 4

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Flow Switch 3
4.1 General 3
4.2 Material 3
Annexure I Data Sheet Format 4

ISO -FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3200
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai FLOW SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 3 of 4

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Flow Switch for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Flow Switch suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration,
preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where
required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 FLOW SWITCH:
4.1 General:
4.1.1 The flow switch shall be Differential Pressure type / Thermal Dispersion type
suitable for Class I, Division I, Group D, T3 class.
4.1.2 The flow switch shall actuate a relay when activated or when shutdown is reached.
The contact rating shall in general be 24 V DC, 2 A. Flow Switches shall have a
repeatability of ±0.2%.
4.1.3 The flow switch shall have either internal / external set point adjustment with
locking mechanism to avoid tampering.
4.1.4 Cable entry to the flow switch shall be ¾” NPTF. Two numbers of cable entry
shall be provided. One cable entry shall be plugged with a plug suitable for the
area classification.
4.1.5 In case Insertion type flow switches are used, the immersion length for probe shall
be 250 mm from flange top face. The projection of flange nozzle from pipe top
face shall be 200 mm.
4.1.6 Plastic bags shall be provided for Flow Switches to protect them during handling,
installation and commissioning.
4.1.7 All switches shall be Ex d.
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for Flow Switches shall in general be according to
clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.
4.2.2 The flow switch sensor material shall be suitable for the process conditions and
shall be minimum SS 316. For water service, the sensor material shall be Monel.

ISO -FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3200
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai FLOW SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 4 of 4

ANNEXURE – I
Typical Data Sheet For Flow Switches
FLOW SWTICHES
3 3
UNITS: Flow Liquid – M /HR. Gas – NM /HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
GENERAL 3 Line Size & Schedule
4 Service
5
6 Switch Type
7
8 End Connection – Size & Rating
9 End Connection – Facing & Finish
10 Material – Body & Flange
11 Material – Element
BODY
12 Range
13
14
15
16
17
18 Type – Electric / Pneumatic
19 Output Type
20 Contact Rating
21 Load Type
22 Enclosure Class
23 Area Class
24 On flow increase – O/p Contact
SWITCH
25 On flow decrease – O/p Contact
26 Accuracy
27 Repeatability
28 Set Point
29 Difference – Fixed / Adjustable
30 Set Point Adjustment – Internal / External
31
32
OPTIONS 33
34
35 Fluid State
36 Flow Min. Maximum
37 Flow Normal
38 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
39 Temperature Operating Maximum
SERVICE 40 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp.
CONDITIONS 41
42 Molecular Weight
43 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
44 Allowable pressure drop
45 Corrosive Content
46
47 IBR Certification
48 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS
49 Model Number
50 Remarks
NOTES:

Vendor’s Seal and Signature

ISO -FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Spec. No. 3201
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL Rev. No. 04 (a)
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR Disciplin
Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TOTALIZER e
Page: 2 OF 4

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.

1.0 Scope of This Document 3

2.0 Codes and Standards 3

2.1 Reference specifications 3

3.0 Scope of Supply 3

4.0 Flow Totalizer 3

4.1 Flow Totalizer type 3

4.2 Accuracy 4

4.3 Reading scales 4

4.4 Enclosure class 4

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3201
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL Rev. No. 04 (a)
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR Disciplin
Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TOTALIZER e
Page: 3 OF 4

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection of Flow
Totalizer for the intended service.

2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications:

a) Basic Bid Work


b) Design Criteria - Process & Instrumentation
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Data Sheets for Instruments

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:


3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the Basic Bid
Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Flow Totalizer suitable for its intended application,
its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories,
spares, and assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site.

4.0 FLOW TOTALIZER:


4.1 General:
The Flow totalizer shall be microprocessor based and shall have user-friendly interface for easy
programming with Passwords for configuration. The totalizer shall be capable of displaying the readings
when requested. The totalizer may either be field mounted or control room mounted as per process
requirement. It shall have flow display using square root or linear signal processing.

4.1.1 The Flow totalizer shall have 2-line display. The top line shall display the instantaneous flow rate while the
second line shall display the totalized flow. LCD type display shall be provided in the Flow totalizer.
Display range for rate shall be 6 digit display or better and for cumulative flow (Total) shall be 8 –digit
display or better. Rate / total display decimal point shall be selectable.

4.1.2 The input power supply to the Flow totalizer shall be 24 V DC. The device shall have two analogue output
for alarms. It shall have capability of processing analogue mA & VDC signal as its input.

4.1.3 It shall have Keypad for process programming and calibration. All programming and total values are
stored in non-volatile memory and can be retrieved even if the power is removed from the unit. The
totalizer shall have provision to save accumulated total flow even if the power is lost.

4.1.4 When Flow totalizer and other devices are grouped and mounted on a gauge board or instrument stand it
should be in such a manner that removal of each instrument shall be possible without the need to

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3201
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL Rev. No. 04 (a)
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR Disciplin
Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TOTALIZER e
Page: 4 OF 4

disconnect, dismantle or remove any other instruments or tubing. Mountings accessories required for
Flow totalizer shall be 316SS or better.

4.2 Accuracy: The accuracy shall be ±0.25%. Repeatability shall be ±0.25%

4.3 Reading Scales: Units for Flow in totalizer shall be set in M3/HR for liquids and SM3 /HR for gases. In
addition, other selectable engineering units ( m3/sec, m3/day, etc) shall be available in the device.

4.4 Enclosure Class: Where specified for field mounting, the flow totalizer enclosure shall be Weather proof
to IP 65 and shall conform to Area Classification. In control room, it shall be housed n general purpose
enclosure to IP 42.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 2 OF 9

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 SMART Type Flow Transmitter 3
4.1 General 3
4.2 Sensor Type 4
4.3 Material 4
4.4 Accuracy 4
4.5 Output Signal 4
4.6 Repeatability 4
4.7 Enclosure Class 5
Annexure I Material Selection Chart 6
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 7
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 9

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 3 OF 9

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection
of Electronic Flow Transmitter for the intended service.
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
a) Instrumentation / Process Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Instrument / Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the
Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Flow Transmitter suitable for
measurement range, accuracy, MoC & standard accessories for its intended application.
3.3 The procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along
with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation & commissioning
at site shall be come under vendor’s responsibility.
4.0 SMART TYPE FLOW TRANSMITTERS:
4.1 General:
4.1.1 Flow Transmitters shall be of differential pressure type
4.1.2 The transmitter shall be mounted local, on a yoke. All mounting accessories required for
2” pipe shall be provided.
4.1.3 Cable entry to the transmitter shall be ½” NPTF.
4.1.4 The flow transmitter shall be provided with a 5-valve manifold.
4.1.5 The transmitter shall have 130% (static pressure) over-range protection.
4.1.6 The Flow transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and certified by statutory body like
UL/FM/BASEEFA/CMRI/DGMS or equivalent.
4.1.7 The transmitter should have Digital output meter (with engineering units). Flow
Transmitter shall be easily visible from grade. Where this is not possible, a separate loop-
powered indicator shall be provided for easy visibility. The output meter shall be suitable
for use in the hazardous area.
4.1.8 Flow Transmitters shall have a means for calibration that permits adjustment of the zero
output and span output.
4.1.9 Flow Transmitters shall be five- (5) point bench calibrated using a hydraulic or dead weight
tester or precision pneumatic calibrator prior to installation as well as after installation at
site. All calibration shall be carried out with certified master calibrators (valid and proved

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 4 OF 9

by reputed accredited testing labs) or with calibrators tested and traceable to the standard
labs for calibration.
4.1.10 ‘Universal Hand Held Configurator’ shall be supplied for transmitters’ calibration. The
number of calibrator shall be two per process platform & one per well platform.
4.1.11 All vent and drains of the transmitter/tubing/valve manifolds shall be routed to the Drain
Header. If the meter is on the sour service and harmful fluids like chemicals etc, then it will
be routed to close drain header.

4.1.12 Transmitters shall be immune to Radio frequency interference due to walkie-talkie, paging
system, communication system etc. All electronic modules shall be designed for short
circuit protection.
4.2 Sensor Type:
4.2.1 The pressure element in the measuring unit shall be Diaphragm / Delta cell Type.
4.2.2 For measurement at slurries, viscous & corrosive fluid Diaphragm Seals shall be used.
Wherever Diaphragm seals are required they shall be “Liquid Filled System” type with a
1½” Flanged process connection and flexible armor. The diaphragm seal shall also have a
flushing filling connection with plug.
4.2.3 The process connection of the transmitter shall be ½” NPTF.
4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for Flow Transmitters shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria. Material Selection Chart provided in Annexure
– I of this document .and FS-2004A for Piping Design (2008) & Piping Material
Specification
4.3.2 The element material of the measuring unit shall be suitable for the process conditions.
The Wetted parts of the diaphragm seal shall be same as that of the element material. The
capillary material shall be SS 316 and the armour material shall be SS 304.
4.3.3 All wetted parts shall be suitable for intended process application.
4.4 Accuracy:
4.4.1 Flow Transmitters shall have an accuracy of ±0.1 % of span or better.

4.5 Output Signal:


4.5.1 Output signal shall be 2 wired 4-20 mA DC, and capable of delivering the rated current
signal into external load of around 600 ohms when powered with nominal 24V DC
(negative earthed).
4.5.2 Transmitters shall have HART protocol for communication for remote calibration and
diagnostics from HART maintenance system
4.6 Repeatability:

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 5 OF 9

4.6.1 Flow Transmitters shall have a repeatability of ±0.1%.

4.7 Enclosure Class:


The transmitter shall be weatherproof (IP 65 or better). In addition the FT enclosure shall
be as per Clause no 3.6.4.4.5 of Instrument Design Criteria

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 6 OF 9

ANNEXURE – I

Flow Transmitter – Material Selection Chart

Flow Transmitter
S. No. Piping Class Valve
Body Sensor
Manifold

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1,


PA1, PB1, PD1, PE1, PXF1,
PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2, XG1, CARBON
1 SS 316 SS 316
A1H, A3, B3, A8 STEEL
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ.
SERVICE)

INJECTION WATER CARBON


2 MONEL SS 316
SERVICE STEEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL MONEL

HASTALLOY
5 A7 TITANIUM TITANIUM
C

** A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N,


6 XF1N, PA1N, PB1N, PD1N, SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
PF1N, XG1N

HASTALLOY
7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS 316 L SS 316 L
C

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, HASTALLOY HASTALLOY


8 -
PB11, PD11, PE11, PF11 C C

[** All Process wetted parts shall be NACE MR-01-75 (Latest Edition ) as minimum ]

ANNEXURE – II

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 7 OF 9

(Hook Up Drawing)

FLOW TRANSMITTER ( ELECTRONIC ) GAS SERVICE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 8 OF 9

CONDENSABLE LIQUID /VAPOUR SERVICE


NOTE :- TAPPING SHALL BE HORIZONTAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3202
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 FLOW TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 9 OF 9

ANNEXURE – III

Typical Data Sheet For Flow Transmitter

FLOW (D.P.) TRANSMITTER

Units : Flow →→Liquid-M /Hr, Gas → Kg/Hr, Steam → Kg/Hr, Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G, Temperature → Deg C, Level/ Length →→mm
3

GENERAL MEASURING UNIT


1 Function 24 Service
25 Element
2 Type 26 Body Material
3 Case 27 Element Material
4 Mounting 28 Process Connection
5 Electrical area Proc. connection. location
Classification 29 Temperature Element
6 Enclosure - Type
Enclosure Class - Leads
7 Intrinsically safe - Sheath OD / Material
8 Power supply Nipple & Union Material
9 Cable entry - Cable Entry
10 Accuracy - Enclosure
Thermo well as per
11 Repeatability 30
drawing
12 TRANSMITTER - Pressure Element
Output 31
13 Trans. Power supply MISCELLANEOUS
14 CONTROLLER 32 Over range protection
Output a OPTIONS
15 A/M Switch b Out put Meter
16 No. of positions c Air filter regulator
Set point adjustment d Mounting accessories
5 - Way Valve Manifold
17 Manual Regulator e
for Tx
18 Mode f Integral Orifice
19 33 SS Tag Plate
34 Load driving capability
Proportional
Derivative
Integral
Range
Sl. Max. Oper./ Zero
Tag. No. Zero Super Service Control Options
No Press. Max. Temp. SPAN SET Elev.

S:
1. Over range protection shall be 130% of maximum static pressure.
2. Local digital Integral output meter shall be intrinsically safe and to be calibrated in engineering unit.
3. Environmental protection cover to be provided for each transmitter
4. For Extended Diaphragm seal with fill in liquid, data sheet shall be suitably filled up.

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 1 OF 8

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 02 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 2 OF 8

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.

1.0 Scope of This Document 3

2.0 Codes and Standards 3

2.1 Applicable Codes & Standards 3

2.2 Reference Specifications 3

3.0 Scope of Supply 3

4.0 Orifice Plates 3

4.1 Application 3

4.2 General 3

4.3 Material 4

4.4 Range 4

4.5 Scales 4

4.6 Flanges 4

4.7 Meter Runs 5

4.8 Orifice Plate Sizing 5

4.9 Miscellaneous 5

Annexure I Material Selection Chart 6

Annexure II Hook-up drawing 7

Annexure III Data Sheet Format 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 3 OF 8

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection of Orifice
Plates for the intended service.

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:


2.1 Applicable Codes & Standards: Latest editions of applicable codes & standards as enlisted in Cl.
3.6.3.1, Instrumentation Design Criteria

2.2 Applicable Documents and Specifications:


a) Basic Bid Work
b) Design Criteria - Process & Instrumentation
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Data Sheets for Instruments

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:


3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the Basic Bid
Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Orifice Plates & Meters suitable for its intended
application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along with
accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS
shall be read in conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.

4.0 ORIFICE FLOW METERS:

4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Orifice Plates shall be used as the flow-measuring element wherever dictated by the process
requirements.
4.1.2 For a standard orifice meter, only one fixed Orifice Plate shall be designed for the rangeability of 3:1 or
less.
In case of flow rangeability higher than 3:1, senior orifice meter with two or more orifice plates shall be
required to cover the entire flow range and the each plate shall be sized for the range of 3:1 or less.

4.2 General:
4.2.1 Fabrication of the orifice plate shall be in accordance with AGA – Gas Measurement Committee, Report
No. 3, latest edition for gas measurement.
4.2.2 The Orifice meter shall in general comprise of a concentric square edged orifice plate designed for flange
tap except for particular process requirements. (Eccentric, segmental or quadrant edged orifices may be
used for special services such as slurry, wet gas or highly viscous service).
4.2.3 Where the orifice plate flow element is coupled with a force balanced or bellows type meter, the meter
shall be with a built-in adjustable dampening device.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 4 OF 8

4.2.4 The Orifice Plate Assembly shall be capable of withstanding differential pressure equal to full line
pressure without zero or calibration change.
4.2.5 Orifice plate beta ratio (orifice diameter/ inside pipe diameter) in general shall be between 0.2 and 0.75.

4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for orifice plates shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.5 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart provided in Annexure I of this
specification.

4.4 Range:
4.4.1 Differential ranges for orifice flow meters shall not exceed 5000 mm (200 inches) of water. Typical meter
ranges for gas, steam, or vapor, streams shall be as follows:

STATIC PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE


2
(Kg / cm g (PSIG)) (mm of Water (inches))
0.35 to 2.5 (5-35) 500 - 1250 (20 - 50)
2.5 to 6 (35 - 85) 1250 - 2500 (50 - 100)
Above 6 (Above 85) As per AGA-3 guidelines.
4.4.2 The range 2500 mmwc (100 inches WC) is desirable wherever possible in line with AGA-3 guidelines in
case of static pressure of 6 Kg/cm2g and above.
4.4.3 Orifice meter ranges shall preferably be chosen such that the normal flow is between 60% and 80% of the
meter range.

4.5 Scales:
4.5.1 Scales for orifice metering system shall be 0 - 10 square root with multiplication factor to suit rate of flow
requirements for DP (Bellows ) type Pneumatic flow meter.
Orifice flow meter with totaliser (with or without pressure correction) shall be provided with a proper
multiplication factor in line with the flow calculation as per AGA-3 with AGA-8 (for gas). Linear scale of
DPT shall be combined with the Square root scale of Totaliser.
In case of orifice meter with MVT ( with integrated flow computer / separate Flow computer at site) and
FT with panel ( at CCR) mounted flow computer, the range of process parameters like Pressure,
Temperature, Diff. Pressure, Flow etc shall be as per the Basic Bid Work / approved P & IDs of the
respective projects.

4.6 Flanges:
4.6.1 Orifice flanges and fittings shall be installed according to AGA - Gas Measurement Committee Report No.
3.
4.6.2 Orifice flanges shall be in accordance with the standard ANSI B 16.36 with a minimum flange rating of
300# ANSI and a minimum of 1½-inch pipe size.
4.6.3 Two pairs of flange taps located diametrically opposite shall be provided. Location of taps & Tap sizes
shall be in accordance with the AGA-3 standard, latest edition. The spare tappings shall be plugged with
SS 316 as a minimum.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 5 OF 8

4.6.4 Unless otherwise specified, Orifice flange shall be RF, weld neck type for low pressure application (< 600
# rating). For high pressure application ( > or = ANSI # 600), flanges shall be of RTJ type. Based on
process requirement, final material and selection of flanges shall be in accordance with the standard
ANSI B-16.36 & AGA-3.

4.7 Meter Runs:


4.7.1 All meter runs (Upstream & Downstream) shall be designed for flange tap differential measurement
unless otherwise specified as per AGA - Gas measurement committee report No. 3, latest edition.
4.7.2 Orifice meter runs shall not be for less than 1 - ½” nominal pipe size. Where required, the piping dia shall
be blown up to the required size for installing the meter run / orifice, in line with the applicable standards.
4.7.3 The straight length of upstream & downstream pipe works shall be in accordance with the standard AGA-
3. No connections shall be made in either the upstream or downstream straight pipe work, other than the
orifice flange tappings. In case sufficient straight run is not available for the given piping geometry, meter
runs with straightening vanes may be used. These straightening vanes shall be as per AGA 3. The
straightening vane material shall be 316 SS or better to suit the process conditions. The location of
Temperature sensor (on the downstream only) shall be within 5 to 20 D internal diameter of the pipe run.

4.8 Orifice Plate Sizing:


Orifice plate sizing shall be based on AGA 3 with AGA-8 standards for gas application & ISO-5167 for
liquid application. Sizing calculations shall be submitted to Company for approvals.

4.9 Miscellaneous:
4.9.1 Orifice meter design and installation shall be in accordance with the AGA - Gas Measurement Committee
Report No. 3. It is preferred that metering orifices be located in horizontal lines.
4.9.2 Orifice flanges or meter tubes shall be installed horizontally near the deck or platform for ease of
accessibility and safe changing of the orifice plate.
4.9.3 Orifice plates shall be installed after line flushing is completed, before hydro testing.
4.9.4 Prior to installing the orifice plate, it shall be checked against the Instrument Specification sheet and
inspected by the Company’s representative.
4.9.5 The static pressure element shall be connected to the upstream pressure tap on gas flow measurement.
4.9.6 Piping and equipment shall be arranged so that flashing does not occur at or upstream of orifice plates.
4.9.7 The piping layout shall always be arranged such that straightening vanes are not required and gas meter
runs are self-draining.
4.9.8 Upstream elbows in more than one plane shall be avoided to minimize vorticity.
4.9.9 Orifice plate shall be checked for correct alignment, and correct orientation with respect to the process
flow.
4.9.10 Orifice Plates shall be checked visually for nameplate data and for an upstream sharp edge. Bore shall
be callipered to check for compliance with specifications.
4.9.11 All socket-weldings shall be 100% Dye penetration / Magnetic particle tested. All other welding shall be
100% radio graphed.
4.9.12 The orifice plates shall be suitably marked with tag. Nos., bore size & direction of mounting.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 6 OF 8

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Orifice Plates

Orifice Assembly
S.
Piping Class Flange /
No. Plate
Body
A1, B1, D1, E1, F1,
XF1, F1, PA1, PB1,
PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1,
A2, B2, D2, E2, XG1, CARBON
1 STEEL
SS 316
A1H, A3, B3, A8
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ.
SERVICE)

INJECTION WATER CARBON


2 SERVICE STEEL
MONEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS 316 SS 316

90-10 Cu
4 A5 Ni / MONEL
MONEL

5 A7 TITANIUM TITANIUM

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N,


F1N, XF1N, PA1N, CARBON
6 PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, STEEL
SS 316
XG1N

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS 316 L SS 316 L

A11, B11, D11, E11,


DUPLEX INCONEL
8 F11, PA11, PB11, PD11,
SS 625
PE11, PF11

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 7 OF 8

ANNEXURE – II (Hook-Up Drawing, typical, for Gas application)

Slope : 1:12,
upwards

96

ORIFICE PLATES FLANGE CONNECTIONS

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3203
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 04
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY Page: 8 OF 8

ANNEXURE – III - Typical Data Sheet For Orifice Plates

ORIFICE PLATES (With FLANGES)


3 3
UNITS: Flow Liquid – M /HR. Gas – NM /HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
GENERAL 3 Line Size & Schedule
4 Service
5 Inlet Line ID Outlet Line ID
6 Diff Range In mm H2O
METER
7 Meter Maximum
8 Type
9 Sizing As Per
10 Material
11 Thickness “W” In Mm
PLATE
12 Beta Ratio d/D
13 Bore Dia. ‘d’
14 Vent / Drain
15 Center Distance ‘R’
16 Type
17 Tap Type Size
18 Number Of Taps Per Flange
19 Material
20 Size & Rating
21 Facing & Finish
22 Line ID / OD
FLANGES
23 Gasket Thickness Mm
24 Gasket Material
25 Plate Holder
26 Plate Holder Material
27 Stud Bolt Material
28 Nut Material
29 Wetted Part Material
30 Straightening Vanes
OPTIONS 31 Connection
32 Material
33 Fluid State
34 Flow Min. Maximum
35 Flow Normal
Inlet Pressure
36 Maximum
Operating
Temperature
37 Maximum
SERVICE CONDITIONS Operating
38 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp. 15 OC
39 Molecular Weight Cp / Cv
40 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
41 Compressibility Factor
42 Pipe Reynolds Number
43 IBR Certification
44 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS
45 Model Number

NOTE:-
1. Orifice assembly must include supply of plates, flanges, stud, bolts, nuts, jack screw, gasket / plate, holder & plugs.

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3204
Design Division
For Rev. No :3
Engg. Services
RESTRICTION Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
ORIFICE ASSEMBLY Page : 1 of 5

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
RESTRICTION ORIFICE ASSEMBLY

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE REV. No.
REVISED BY BY
PAGES
VS SRS GRP 5 18.02.2008 3
ET RS GRP 7 28.03.2007 2
AK MC RK 7 22.07.2005 1
ET MC AC 7 13.05.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3204
Design Division
For Rev. No :3
Engg. Services
RESTRICTION Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
ORIFICE ASSEMBLY Page : 2 of 5

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope Of This Document 3
2.0 Standards And Specifications 3
2.1 Reference Specifications 3
2.2 Other Specifications to be followed 3
3.0 Scope Of Supply 3
4.0 Restriction Orifice Assembly 4
4.1 Application 4
4.2 General 4
4.3 Material 4
4.4 Range 4
4.5 Flanges 5
4.6 Meter Runs 5
4.7 Orifice Plate Sizing 5
Annexure I Typical Data Sheet – Restriction Orifice Plates 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3204
Design Division
For Rev. No :3
Engg. Services
RESTRICTION Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
ORIFICE ASSEMBLY Page : 3 of 5

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Orifice Plates for the intended service.
2.0 STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS:
2.1 Reference Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
e) MR / OD / INST / FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Flow Meter.
2.2 Other Specifications To Be Followed:
a) ISA RP 3.2
b) API 2531
c) API Manual of Petroleum Measurement – Chapter 4
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the
Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Orifice Plates suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation
for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its
installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in conjunction with the
Instrument Design Criteria.
3.3 The Restriction Orifice Assembly shall include Orifice Plates complete with studs, bolts,
nuts, jackscrews, gaskets, plate holders and plugs and all other accessories necessary to
make the system complete.
4.0 RESTRICTION ORIFICE ASSEMBLLY:
4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Restriction Orifice Fittings shall be used wherever process requirements dictate pressure
reduction.
4.2 General:
4.2.1 Details of the Orifice Plates to be used in the Restriction Orifice Assembly shall in
general be as per Document No. MR / OD / INST / FS / 3203: Functional Specification
for Orifice Flow Meter.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3204
Design Division
For Rev. No :3
Engg. Services
RESTRICTION Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
ORIFICE ASSEMBLY Page : 4 of 5

4.2.2 The orifice plates shall be welded together to make ‘RO’ assembly. However, the last
plate shall not be welded and an arrangement shall be made to remove and replace the
last plate.
4.2.3 For the RO Assembly, certain overlaps shall be provided between successive plates.
4.2.4 The installation of Restriction Orifice Assembly shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.6 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and as per clause 6.0 of FS 3203: Functional
Specification for Orifice Flow Meter.
4.2.5 Sizing calculations for restriction orifice assemblies shall be furnished along with the
purchase specification. These calculations shall include number of plates, bore diameter,
thickness of each plate, stress calculation, etc.
4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for orifice plates to be used in the Restriction Orifice
Assembly shall in general be according to clause 4.3 of Document No. MR / OD / INST /
FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Flow Meter.
4.3.2 The material requirements for Restriction Orifice Assemblies shall in general be
according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.
4.4 Range:
4.4.1 Range selection for Orifice Plates used in the Restriction Orifice Assembly shall in
general be according to clause 4.4 of Document No. MR / OD / INST / FS / 3203:
Functional Specification for Orifice Flow Meter.
4.5 Flanges:
4.5.1 Flange requirements for Orifice Plates used in the Restriction Orifice Assembly shall in
general be according to clause 4.6 of Document No. MR / OD / INST / FS / 3203:
Functional Specification for Orifice Flow Meter.
4.6 Meter Runs:
4.6.1 Meter runs required for Restriction Orifice Assembly shall in general be according to
clause 4.7 of Document No. MR / OD / INST / FS / 3203: Functional Specification for
Orifice Flow Meter.
4.7 Orifice Plate Sizing:
4.7.1 Sizing for Orifice plate to be used in the Restriction Orifice assembly shall be based on
and AGA Report No. 3. Orifice plate sizing calculations shall be submitted to Company
for review.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3204
Design Division
For Rev. No :3
Engg. Services
RESTRICTION Discipline: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
ORIFICE ASSEMBLY Page : 5 of 5

ANNEXURE – I - TYPICAL DATA SHEET FOR RESTRICTION ORIFICE ASSEMBLY


UNITS: Flow Liquid – M3/HR. Gas – NM3/HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
GENERAL 3 Line Size & Schedule
4 Service
5 Plate Only Assembly
6 Required Pressure Drop
7 Type Concentric Square edged
8 Single Stage Pressure Reduction
9 Multiple Stage Pressure Reduction
10
11 Material
PLATE
12 Thickness “W” In Mm
13 Beta Ratio d/D
14 Bore Dia. ‘d’
15 Vent / Drain
16 Center Distance ‘R’
17
18
19
20 Type
21 Material
22 Size & Rating
23 Facing & Finish
24 Line ID / OD
FLANGES
25 Gasket Thickness Mm
26 Gasket Material
27 Plate Holder
28 Plate Holder Material
29 Stud Bolt Material
30 Nut Material
31 Welded Construction
32 Spool Piece Length
OPTIONS 33 Connection
34 Material
35 Fluid State
36 Flow Min. Maximum
37 Flow Normal
38 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
39 Temperature Operating Maximum
40 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp. 15 OC
SERVICE
41
CONDITIONS
42 Molecular Weight Cp / Cv
43 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
44 Compressibility Factor
45 Pipe Reynolds Number
46
47 IBR Certification
49 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS
50 Model Number
Notes

Vendor’s Sign and Seal

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Spec. No. 3205
Offshore Design Section Functional Specifications
Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services
SENIOR ORIFICE Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000
ASSEMBLY Page: 1 OF 5

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

SENIOR ORIFICE ASSEMBLY

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3205
Offshore Design Section Functional Specifications
Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services
SENIOR ORIFICE Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000
ASSEMBLY Page: 2 OF 5

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Senior Orifice Assembly 3
4.1 Application 3
4.2 General 3
4.3 Material 4
4.4 Range 4
4.5 Scales 4
4.6 Flanges 4
4.7 Meter Runs 4
4.8 Orifice Plate Sizing 4
4.9 Miscellaneous 4
Annexure I Data Sheet Format 5

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3205
Offshore Design Section Functional Specifications
Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services
SENIOR ORIFICE Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000
ASSEMBLY Page: 3 OF 5

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Senior Orifice Assembly for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Applicable Codes & Standards : Latest editions of applicable codes &
standards as enlisted in Cl. 3.6.3.1, Instrumentation Design Criteria.
2.2 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Basic Bid Work
b) Design Criteria - Process & Instrumentation
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Data Sheets for Instruments / Instrument List with Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements
indicated in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Senior Orifice Assembly
suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and
assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS
shall be read in conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
3.3 The Senior Orifice assembly shall include Orifice Plates, sliding valve, equalizer,
stuffing box, plate carrier, sealing unit, flanges, senior orifice fittings, studs, bolts,
nuts, hand wrench, plugs and all the accessories to make the system complete.
Chamber venting with vent valve shall be possible for senior orifice.
3.4 No. of Orifice plates to be supplied along with the Senior Orifice assembly shall
be as per the Process data sheet to cover the complete range and each plate shall
be sized for the range of 3:1 or less as per AGA 3 with AGA 8.
4.0 SENIOR ORIFICE ASSEMBLLY:
4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Senior Orifice Fittings shall be used as the flow-measuring element wherever
dictated by the process requirements.
4.1.2 On line retractable orifice fittings assembly shall be used to provide periodic
checking / changing of orifice plates without disturbing normal operation.

4.2 General:
4.2.1 Details of the Orifice Plates to be used in the Senior Orifice Assembly shall in
general be as per FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Plate Assembly.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3205
Offshore Design Section Functional Specifications
Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services
SENIOR ORIFICE Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000
ASSEMBLY Page: 4 OF 5

4.2.2 The Senior Orifice Assembly shall be capable of withstanding differential


pressure equal to full line pressure without zero or calibration change.
4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for Senior Orifice Assemblies shall in general be
according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and clause 4.3 of
FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Plate Assembly.
4.4 Range:
4.4.1 Range selection for Orifice Plates used in the Senior Orifice Assembly shall in
general be according to clause 4.4 of FS / 3203: Functional Specification for
Orifice Plate Assembly.
4.5 Scales:
4.5.1 Scales for Orifice Plates used in the Senior Orifice Assembly shall in general be
according to clause 4.5 of FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Plate
Assembly.
4.6 Flanges:
4.6.1 Flange for Senior Orifice Assembly shall in general be according to clause 4.6 of
FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Plate Assembly. However,
referring to 4.6.4 of FS / 3203, “Senior Orifice fittings” shall be in general weld
neck in the upstream and Flanged in the downstream.
4.7 Meter Runs:
4.7.1 Meter runs required for Senior Orifice Assembly shall in general be according to
FS / 3203: Functional Specification for Orifice Plate Assembly.
4.8 Orifice Plate Sizing:
4.8.1 Sizing for Orifice plate to be used in the Senior Orifice assembly shall be based
on AGA Report No. 3 & 8. Orifice plate sizing calculations shall be submitted to
Company for review.
4.9 MISCELLANEOUS :
4.9.1 The installation of Senior Orifice Assembly shall in general be according to
clause 3.6.4.6 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and as mentioned in the FS 3203
/ Functional Specification for Orifice Plate assembly.
4.9.2 Calibration, inspection and testing requirements shall in general be as per clause
3.6.4.7 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3205
Offshore Design Section Functional Specifications
Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services
SENIOR ORIFICE Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000
ASSEMBLY Page: 5 OF 5

ANNEXURE – I - TYPICAL DATA SHEET FOR SENIOR ORIFICE ASSEMBLY


SENIOR ORIFICE ASSEMBLY
3
UNITS: Flow Liquid – M /HR. Gas – NM3/HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
GENERAL 3 Line Size & Schedule
4 Service
5 Inlet Line ID Outlet Line ID
6 Diff Range In mm H2O
METER 7 Meter Maximum
8
9 Type Conn. Square Edged
10 Sizing As Per AGA 3 & API RP 3.2
11 Material
12 Thickness “W” In Mm
PLATE 13 Beta Ratio d/D
14 Bore Dia. ‘d’
15 Vent / Drain
16 Center Distance ‘R’
17
Upstream : Weld Neck
18 Type
Down Stream : Flange
19 Tap Type Size Flanged ½” NPT
20 Number Of Taps Per Flange Two
21 Material
22 Size & Rating
23 Facing & Finish
24 Line ID / OD
FLANGES
25 Gasket Thickness Mm
26 Gasket Material
27 Plate Holder
28 Plate Holder Material
29 Stud Bolt Material
30 Nut Material
31 Wetted Part Material Same As Plate
32
33 Straightening Vanes
OPTIONS 34 Connection
35 Material
36 Fluid State
37 Flow Min. Maximum
38 Flow Normal
39 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
40 Temperature Operating Maximum
41 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp. 15 OC
SERVICE
42
CONDITIONS
43 Molecular Weight Cp / Cv
44 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
45 Compressibility Factor
46 Pipe Reynolds Number
47
48 IBR Certification
49 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS
50 Model Number

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Design Division Spec # 3206
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai ROTAMETERS Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 1 of 6

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

ROTAMETERS

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED REV.
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE
REVISED BY BY No.
PAGES
VS SRS GRP 6 18.02.2008 3
ET RS GRP 9 28.03.2007 2
ET MC RK 9 23.06.2005 1
ET MC AC 9 10.03.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3206
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai ROTAMETERS Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 2 of 6

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Rotameters 3
4.1 Application 3
4.2 General 3
4.3 Material 3
4.4 Range 4
4.5 Reading Scales 4
4.6 Accuracy 4
4.7 Transmitters 4
4.8 Miscellaneous 4
Annexure I Material Selection Chart 5
Annexure II Data Sheet Format 6

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3206
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai ROTAMETERS Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 3 of 6

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Rotameters for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Rotameters suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration,
preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where
required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
3.3 The Rotameter Assembly shall include the meter, transmitter (where required) and
all other accessories necessary to make the system complete.
4.0 ROTAMETER:
4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Rotameter shall be used as the flow-measuring element wherever dictated by the
process requirements.
4.1.2 In general Rotameter shall be used when:
a) Linear flow rate signal characteristics are required.
b) Extremely low flow rate measurement is involved.
c) Rangeability is greater than 3 to 1.
4.2 General:
4.2.1 The Rotameter shall in general be metal tube type with bottom inlet and top outlet
connections.
4.2.2 The metering tube shall have self-guided floats, with top and bottom float stops.
4.2.3 The pressure drop across the Rotameter shall be minimum.
4.2.4 The Rotameter shall be provided with flanged end connections, the facing and
finish of which shall be as per the piping specifications.
4.2.5 Armoured meters shall have a metal tube with magnetically coupled integral
indicator.
4.3 Material:

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3206
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai ROTAMETERS Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 4 of 6

4.3.1 The material requirements for Rotameter shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart provided
in Annexure I of this specification.
4.3.2 The Rotameter tube, float and end fittings shall in general be SS 316, unless
otherwise mentioned.
4.3.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all wetted parts are compatible with the process
conditions.
4.4 Range:
4.4.1 The range of the Rotameter shall be selected such that the normal flow rate is
between 50% and 100% of the instrument range.
4.5 Reading Scales:
4.5.1 Scales for Rotameters shall be direct reading, marked for 10-100% of flow.
4.5.2 The flow rate shall be indicated by the vertical position of the float or magnetically
coupled pointer.
4.6 Accuracy:
4.6.1 Rotameter shall have an accuracy of +/- 2% or better.
4.7 Transmitter:
4.7.1 Wherever transmitters are to be provided, they shall be 2-wire magnetic type. The
transmitter shall operate on 24 V DC and shall give an output of 4 – 20 mA. The
transmitter shall be intrinsically safe with the enclosure class for Rotameter being
Weather proof to IP 65 or better
4.8 Miscellaneous
4.8.1 Rotameters shall be installed vertically with the outlet connection at the top and the
inlet connection at the bottom.
4.8.2 Rotameters shall be installed as received. A level plumb shall be used to check for
proper installation.
4.8.3 The Rotameter location shall be free from vibration.
4.8.4 The Rotameter shall be located with sufficient clearance for maintenance purposes,
including float removal, without dismantling the meter body from the pipeline.
4.8.5 Elbows, valves & other fittings shall not be closer than 5 pipe diameters upstream.
4.8.6 The meters shall be provided with two full-bore isolating valves and by-pass valve
for maintenance.
4.8.7 A check valve shall be installed downstream, where backflow may be expected in
gas service, or where there is the possibility of liquid hammer.
4.8.8 Rotameters shall be checked and tested after installation both at yard and at
offshore site to confirm that shipping stops have been removed.
4.8.9 The transmitting mechanism of the Rotameters shall be checked by mechanically
raising and lowering the float and then checking the output.
4.8.10 Rotameter calibration curve shall also be furnished along with the purchase
specification.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3206
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai ROTAMETERS Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 5 of 6

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Rotameter

Rotameter
S. No. Piping Class
Body End Fitt. Float
A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1,
PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2,
1 XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8 SS 316 SS 316
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE - -

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS 316 SS 316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

5 A7 TITANIUM TITANIUM

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N,


6 PA1N, PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS 316 SS 316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS 316 L SS 316 L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11,


8 PD11, PE11, PF11
- -

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3206
Engineering Services Functional Specifications Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai ROTAMETERS Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 Page # 6 of 6

ANNEXURE – II - Typical Data Sheet For Rotameter


ROTAMETER
3 3
UNITS: Flow Liquid – M /HR. Gas – NM /HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
3 Service
4 Type
5 Function
GENERAL 6 Mounting
7 Connection Type Size & Rating
8 Length & Finish
9 Connection Inlet Outlet
10 Enclosure Class
11 Tube Size Float Guide
12 Tube Material Float Material
13 Scale Length & Type
14 Scale Graduation
15 Range
METER 16 Meter Factor
17 End Fitting Material (FLG.)
18 Packing or O Ring Material
19 Accuracy
20
21
22 Extension Well Material
EXTENSION
23 Gasket Material
24 Type
25 Power Supply
26 Output
TRANSMITTER 27 Electrical Area Class
28 Scale Range
29 Enclosure
30 Cable Entry
31 Protective Shield with safety glass
32 Jacking – Medium Connection
33 - Temp. Pressure
34 Constant – Diff. Relay
OPTIONS 35 Needle valve
36 Flange to flange distance
37 Filter regulator with gauge
38
39
40 Fluid State
41 Flow Min. Maximum
42 Flow Normal
43 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
44 Temperature Operating Maximum
SERVICE
45 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp. Mol. Wt.
CONDITIONS
46 System Pressure Drop
47 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
48 Max. Allowable pressure drop
49
50
51 Manufacturer Model No.
52 Tube Nos. Float No.
ITEM DETAILS
53 IBR Certification
54 Remarks

NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Spec. No. 3207
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 TURBINE FLOW METER
Page: 1 OF 6

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

TURBINE FLOW METER

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3207
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 TURBINE FLOW METER
Page: 2 OF 6

CONTENTS

Cl. No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Turbine Flow meter 3
4.1 Application 3
4.2 General 3
4.3 Material 4
4.4 Over speed Protection 4
4.5 Rangeability 4
4.6 Accuracy 4
4.7 Totalizer 4
4.8 Pre-Amplifier 5
4.9 Transmitter 5
4.10 Flow Conditioner 5
4.11 Miscellaneous 5
Annexure I Data Sheet 6

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3207
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 TURBINE FLOW METER
Page: 3 OF 6

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection of
Turbine Flow meter for the intended service/ application.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 The following codes and standards (latest edition) are referenced to and make a part of this
specification.

Numbers Description
AGA Report - 7 Measurement of Natural Gas by Turbine Meters
API MPMS Chapter 4 Proving system
Chapter 5 Section 3
NACE MR-0175 Metals for Sulphide Stress Cracking and Stress corrosion
(Revision 2003 or later) Cracking Resistance in Sour Oilfield Environments

2.2 Reference Documents and Specifications:


a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the Basic
Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Turbine Flow meter suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for
shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation &
commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
3.3 Turbine Flow Meter Assembly shall include flow element, pre-amplifier, transmitter (if
required), flow conditioning elements , local flow indicator /Totalizer and all the accessories
necessary to make the system complete.
4.0 Turbine Flow Meters:
4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Turbine Flow Meters shall be used as the flow-measuring element wherever dictated by the
process requirements.
4.2 General:
4.2.1 The turbine flow meters shall be provided with flanged end connections, the facing and finish of
which shall be as per the piping specifications.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3207
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 TURBINE FLOW METER
Page: 4 OF 6

4.2.2 The flow direction shall be clearly stamped or cast on the body.
4.2.3 Meter cable entry shall be ¾” NPTF.
4.2.4 The turbine meter shall have dual pick-ups with dual pre-amplifiers. Fidelity and Security of
Flow Measurement Pulsed-Data Transmission Systems shall be in accordance with API Manual
of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 5 Section 5. Any unused pick-up amplifier
combination shall be covered as per area classification requirement.
4.2.5 The Turbine Meter pick-up coil shall be hermetically sealed.
4.2.6 The enclosure for pre-amplifier /transmitter/ Totalizer shall be weather proof to minimum IP 65
and shall be certified for use in Class I, Division I, Group D, T3 hazardous area by a statutory
body.
4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for Turbine Flow Meters shall in general be according to Cl. 3.6.4.5
of Instrumentation Design Criteria, FS- 2004A for Piping Design (2008) & Piping Material
Specification.
4.3.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all wetted parts are compatible with the process conditions.
Rotors shall be constructed from SS 316 as a minimum, unless otherwise mentioned.
4.3.3 All wetted parts of Turbine assemblies shall meet NACE MR-01-75 2003 or later for Sour
service.
4.3.4 Tube bundle material for flow conditioner if used shall be same as that of meter internals.
4.3.5 Bearing shall be of tungsten carbide and self lubricating type.
4.4 Over Speed Protection:
4.4.1 The turbine flow meter shall have an over-speed protection of 130% of maximum flow rate.
4.5 Rangeability
4.5.1 Rangeability shall be 10:1 for liquid service and better for Gas Service
4.6 Accuracy:
Turbine Flow Meter shall have accuracy of ±0.2% or better over the total flow range.
4.6.1 Linearity:
Turbine Flow Meters shall have a linearity of ±0.5% of rated flow range.
4.6.2 Repeatability:
Turbine Flow Meters shall have a repeatability of ±0.02% (Minimum Flow to Maximum Flow).
4.7 Totalizer:
4.7.1 The Totalizer shall have local indication for resettable totalized flow (batch), non resettable
cumulative flow and instantaneous flow rate indication.
4.7.2 The Totalizer will have in general, two displays of totalized flow on 6 digit (min) LCD backlit
screen. Resettable display will also toggle to display instantaneous flow rate. Totalizer shall
display flow rate, totalized flows in engineering units. It shall also have data logging facility for
minimum fifteen days

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3207
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 TURBINE FLOW METER
Page: 5 OF 6

4.7.3 Permanent batteries (Li-ion or equivalent) with life of minimum 3 years will be provided for
Totalizer .Battery change shall not cause any loss of data.
4.7.4 The Totalizer shall be capable of providing ‘low battery’ indication on the LCD screen.
4.7.5 Totalizer/ integral LCD meter provided with the Turbine flow meter shall be easily accessible
from grade level. Where this is not possible, Totalizer shall be remotely mounted for easy access
and mounting accessories for 2” stanchion shall be provided with the turbine flow meter.
4.8 Pre-Amplifier:
4.8.1 Pre-amplifier provided with the turbine flow meter shall be intrinsically safe, and shall be located
on the meter.
4.8.2 The pre-amplifier shall operate on 24 V DC signal.
4.8.3 The cable entry to the pre-amplifier shall be ¾” NPTF.
4.9 Transmitter:
4.9.1 The transmitter if provided with the turbine flow meter shall be SMART and intrinsically safe
and shall operate on 24 V DC power.
4.9.2 The cable entry to the transmitter shall be ¾” NPTF.
4.10 Flow conditioner:
4.10.1 Flow conditioner shall be used where adequate straight runs are not available. The flow
straighteners if used for Turbine Flow Meters may be of either tube type or vane type.
4.10.2 Construction of conditioning plates / straightener shall correspond in general to API MPMS
Chapter 5 Section 3.
4.10.3 Straightening vanes when used shall be of flange type.
4.11 Miscellaneous
4.11.1 Suitable strainers will be considered to provide adequate protection to the internals of the turbine
meter. Material of the constructions shall be minimum 316SS.
4.11.2 The Turbine Flow Meters shall be installed after hydro testing and line flushing.
4.11.3 Turbine Flow Meters shall be calibrated using mechanical displacement meter prover as per API
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Chapter 4.
4.11.4 All castings and welding (other than slip-on welds, which shall be Dye Penetration tested) shall
be 100% radio graphed.
4.11.5 For Custody transfer application, International Organization of Legal Metrology (OIML)
certification for Liquid Turbine Meter (Model Type) shall be submitted by vendor.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3207
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 TURBINE FLOW METER
Page: 6 OF 6

ANNEXURE – I - Typical Data Sheet for Turbine Flow Meter


UNITS: Flow Liquid – M3/HR. Gas – NM3/HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – co Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
3 Line Size & Schedule
GENERAL
4 Service
5
6 End Connection Size & Rating
7 End Connection Facing & Finish
8 Pulses / m3
9 Flow Range
10 Enclosure
11 Cable Entry
12 K Factor - Cycles per volumetric unit.
13 Excitation
14 Maximum speed
METER
15 Minimum output voltage
16 Pick off type
17 Material – Body
18 - End Connection
19 - Rotor
20 - Bearing
21 - Other Wetted Parts
22 Accuracy Repeatability
23 Totalizer Type
24 Type – 2-wire / 3-wire
25 Pre-Amplifier Location
26 Power Supply Cable Entry
PRE-AMPLIFIER
27 Enclosure
28 Intrinsically Safe
29 Mounting
30 Power Supply Cable Entry
31 Enclosure
TRANSMITTER
32 Intrinsically Safe
33 Mounting
34 Compensation – Viscosity
35 Conditioner element
OPTIONS
36 End Connection Material
37 Eliminator
38 Strainer Size & Mesh
OPTIONS (GAS)
39 Pressure tap on meter body
40 Fluid State
41 Flow Min. Maximum
42 Flow Normal
43 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
44 Temperature Operating Maximum
45 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp. 15 OC
SERVICE
46 System Pressure Drop
CONDITIONS
47 Molecular Weight Cp / Cv
48 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
49 Compressibility Factor
50 Pipe Reynolds Number
51 Percent Solid & type
52 Back Pressure
53 Area Classification
54 EMI / RFI protection
55 Manufacturer
56 Material certificate
57 Calibration certificate
58 Signal retransmission
59 Meter Model Number
60 Transmitter Model Number
61 Pre-Amplifier Model Number
62 Remarks

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. FS 3208
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 4a
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “CORIOLIS METER”
Page: 2 OF 6

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Coriolis Type Mass Flow Meter 4
4.1 Application 4
4.2 General 4
4.3 Material 5
4.4 Accuracy 5
4.5 Transmitter 5
Annexure I Data Sheet Format 6

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. FS 3208
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 4a
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “CORIOLIS METER”
Page: 3 OF 6

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Coriolis type Mass Flow Meter for the intended service.
1.2 This functional specification shall be read in conjunction with the reference documents
and specifications attached with the Bid documents.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work & P&IDs
c) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List.
d) Relevant API / MPMS standards. (Chapter 5.6 – for Coriolis Meters)
2.2 This FS shall be guideline and specifications for the Coriolis meter, and shall not limit
the vendor /contractor/packager from providing the meter / system as per basic bid
work and P&IDs, with all the necessary hardware, electronic cards power supplies and
accessories for proper measurement & display at field / control room, for the intended
purpose. (Rev 4a)
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in
the Basic Bid Work and approved P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Coriolis type Mass Flow Meter
suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance
where required for its installation & commissioning at site.
3.3 The Coriolis type mass flow meter shall include the sensor, transmitter (with integral or
separate local indicator) and accessories necessary to make the measurement system
complete.
- Where Coriolis type mass flow Meter is a part of Custody type metering system, all
necessary signals shall be terminated / hooked up to a metering panel for metering,
calibration / proving, computation etc.
- Metering system shall be local skid mounted or in metering control room or in
centralized control room as indicated in basic bid work.
- Where DCS is part of the control system in the control room, metering panel may be
located at metering skid or in the equipment room with all necessary provisions for
accessing all metering data / parameters from DCS via serial link, including the
corrected values, process data, etc., as the case may be.
- Where this meter is for measurement only (and not for the custody type metering
system), the meter shall be capable of transmitting the mass flow and density values to
the flow computer / receiver / DCS, as the case may be, for the various display and / or
computation requirements in the control room .

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. FS 3208
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 4a
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “CORIOLIS METER”
Page: 4 OF 6

- Necessary software (and hardware) as required in the control room for computation the
mass, volume flow rate shall be provided by the Vendor. Provision of manual input
/feed of density value shall be kept in the system so supplied.
- Water in oil calculations (Net oil Computations) shall be provided with all necessary
provision for manual entry of densities of oil and water. A separate meter for net oil
computation shall be provided by way of flow computer or Net oil computer, with
display of computed values.
- Necessary software for computation and / or provision to access the computed values
shall be provided, where computation and display in DCS is specified.
4.0 CORIOLIS TYPE MASS FLOW METER:
4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Coriolis type mass flow Meter shall be used as the flow-measuring element and / or
density-measuring element wherever dictated by the process requirements.
4.1.2 In general, Coriolis type mass flow Meters shall be used for direct measurement of
mass flow and / or density of liquids, and where very high turndown ratios are required.
Prototypes or meters with no proven track record in relevant oil and gas service shall
not be supplied.
(a) Typically, Coriolis type mass flow meters shall be used for measurement at the
downstream liquid outlet of conventional test separator for fairly accurate assessment of
the flow of liquid from individual wells
(b) Where precise / accurate measurement of oil flow in custody transfer application is
required Coriolis type mass flow meter may be used in typically low to medium flow
range condition, after which meter size may become a limitation on the availability of
space.
4.2 General:
4.2.1 The Coriolis type mass flow Meter shall be selected such that the nominal bore size of
the sensor is equal to or less than the line size.
4.2.2 The Coriolis type mass flow Meter shall have flanged end connections, with “rating”
and “type” suitable for the associated piping class.
4.2.3 Coriolis type mass flow meter(s) shall be preferably installed in horizontal
configuration (on horizontal piping) and avoid stresses on the piping on which it is
installed. 1” & 2” meters may be installed in flag configuration following the
manufacturer’s recommendations and with suitable supports, where the installation of
the meter on vertical piping becomes inevitable.
4.2.4 The Coriolis type mass flow Meter shall be provided with intrinsically safe local LCD
display (integral or separately mounted near the flow meter or as a part of the locally
mounted transmitter) irrespective of the requirement of display in control room or any
other remote display location mentioned in the basic bid work. In case the display is
not integral, all mounting accessories required for the display shall be provided by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall also provide interconnecting cable (between the
sensor and the local display unit) and the cable glands suitable for the enclosure type
provided. These interconnecting cables shall be kept as short as practicable.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. FS 3208
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 4a
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “CORIOLIS METER”
Page: 5 OF 6

4.2.5 Any special cable and / or hardware which is proprietary but required to make the
system complete shall be supplied by the Contractor. (Rev 4a)
4.2.6 All the welding and castings (if any) shall be 100% radiographed.
4.2.7 All the electronics shall have enclosure suitable for Class I, Div I, Group C & D
Temperature Class T3 applications, and, shall be Weather proof to IP 65 or better.
(Where instruments cannot be provided with enclosures suitable and certified for Class
I, Div I Group C & D by the meter manufacturers, enclosure suitable and certified for
the area classified as Class I, Div II may be accepted in areas approved as “Class I Div
II Group C & D”). Local Indicator, Transmitter, Input / output to peripheral devices like
laptop computers & networks, etc., shall be intrinsically safe. Enclosure type shall be
certified by recognized bodies like IEC / FM / UL / BASEEFA / CENELEC / CSA /
DGMS / PTB / CMRI etc.
4.2.8 Where intrinsically safe electronics / instruments are provided, suitable barriers shall be
recommended along with the instruments / electronics for use in the instrument loop.
4.2.9 Coriolis type mass flow meter shall not be mounted on piping / pipelines subject to
frequent & high vibrations. Suitable precautions shall be taken for locating the meter on
piping down-stream of ‘vibrating’ equipments.
4.2.10 The Coriolis type mass flow Meter Transmitter shall be ‘SMART’ type with 24 V DC
power supply and 2 numbers of 4 – 20 mA output, serial output/s with a local indicator.
4.2.11 On high temperature applications, the transmitter shall be mounted separately from but
local to the sensor. Sensor cables shall be kept as short as practicable.
4.2.12 OIML Certification (Weights & Measures) shall be furnished where the meter is used
for liquid custody transfer applications.
4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for body and wetted parts of the Coriolis type mass flow
Meter shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.
4.3.2 The Contractor shall however ensure that the sensor and all other wetted parts are
compatible with the process fluid conditions. The metal tubing (sensor element) shall
be made of SS 316L as a minimum for NACE applications and SS 316 as a minimum
for non NACE applications, unless the process conditions dictate the use of ‘alternate
materials’ / ‘higher corrosion resistant’ materials.
4.4 Accuracy:
4.4.1 Coriolis type mass flow Meters shall have an accuracy of + 0.2% of flow rate or better,
with repeatability of + 0.1 % or better.
4.4.2 Accuracy for density measurement shall be + 0.001 g/cc or better. Where the meter is
used for custody transfer, the accuracies shall follow the requirements of MPMS
standards for density measurements and computations. (API MPMS 14.6).
4.4.3 Where a Coriolis type mass flow meter is installed in a bypass line for ‘density
measurement’, the design shall ensure that the flow rate through the meter provides the
desired accuracy in measurements.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. FS 3208
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 4a
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “CORIOLIS METER”
Page: 6 OF 6

ANNEXURE – I - Typical Data Sheet For Coriolis type mass flow Meter
CORIOLIS TYPE MASS FLOW METER
UNITS: Flow [ Liquid – (KG or M )/HR :: Gas – NM3/HR].:: Pressure – Kg/cm2 ::Temperature – oC::Level – Mtrs
3

1 Tag Number
2 Line Number
3 Service
GENERAL 4 Function
5 Area Classification
6 Enclosure Class
7 Sensor Material
8 End Connection & Face Finish
9 End Connection Flange Material
10 Sensor Spool Piece Material
11 Other Wetted Parts Material
12 Enclosure Material
13 Measuring Range
METER 14 Adjustable Range
15 Accuracy
16 Sensitivity
17 Repeatability
18 Effect of Temperature
19 Minimum Detection Limit
20 Cable Entry Connection
21 Local Display
22 Power Supply
23 Output
TRANSMITTER 24 Electrical Area Class
25 Enclosure
26 Cable Entry
27 Fluid State
28 Flow Min. Maximum
29 Flow Normal
30 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
31 Temperature Operating Maximum
32 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp. Mol. Wt.
SERVICE 33 System Pressure Drop
CONDITIONS 34 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
Max. Allowable pressure drop across
35
meter
36 Density
Maximum
37 Water Content Normal
Minimum
38 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS 39 Model No.
40 Remarks

NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Design Division Spec # 3210
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai GAS FLOW Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 COMPUTER Page # 1 of 6

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

GAS FLOW COMPUTER

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED REV.
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE
REVISED BY BY No.
PAGES
VS SRS GRP 6 18.02.2008 3
AK BK GRP 9 28.03.2007 2
AK BK GRP 9 31.09.2006 1
ET MC AC 9 13.05.2003 0
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3210
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai GAS FLOW Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 COMPUTER Page # 2 of 6

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Gas Flow Computer 3
4.1 Purpose 3
4.2 General requirements 3
4.3 Type of gas flow computer 5
4.4 Functional requirements 5
4.5 Materials 5
4.6 Accuracy 5
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 6

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3210
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai GAS FLOW Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 COMPUTER Page # 3 of 6

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Gas Flow Computer for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Gas Flow Computer
suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance
where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 GAS FLOW COMPUTER:
4.1 PURPOSE:
4.1.1 The purpose of a Gas Flow Computer is to perform flow calculations, data
archival, data retrieval and data transmission to the required destination.
4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
4.2.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of reading and displaying, as a
minimum, the following: instantaneous flow, compensated flow, cumulative
flow and compensation parameters.
4.2.2 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of calculating flow in accordance
with the latest edition of AGA and API Standards. The Gas Flow Computer
shall use latest edition of AGA-3 for orifice flow calculations and latest edition
of AGA-8 for super compressibility calculations. The Gas Flow Computer
software shall be capable of volume correction as per API standards.
4.2.3 The Wall Mounted Gas Flow Computer shall be provided with a general
purpose enclosure suitable for use in safe area.
4.2.4 The Field Mounted Gas Flow Computer shall be provided with an enclosure
intrinsically safe to IP 65. Necessary certifications shall be attached with
Purchase Specification.
4.2.5 The Gas Flow Computer shall be furnished with all the necessary weather and
anti-corrosion protection to prevent damage from saline and corrosive process
atmosphere.
4.2.6 Mountings accessories required for Gas Flow Computer shall be 316SS or
better. All instrument supports shall be galvanized prior to installation.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3210
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai GAS FLOW Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 COMPUTER Page # 4 of 6

4.2.7 Power Supply:


4.2.7.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall operate on 24 V DC supply.
4.2.7.2 The Gas Flow Computer shall have sufficient battery back-up to retain data for
a minimum of 15 days. This back-up battery may be permanent type for field-
mounted units and shall be rechargeable type or permanent type for units
mounted in the safe area. In case the back-up battery is rechargeable type, a
battery charger that can operate on 24 V DC supply shall be provided. In case
the back-up battery in permanent type, the battery shall have a life of not less
than 2 years, in continuous service. Also one set of spare batteries shall be
provided for future requirement, provided, they have a shelf life of more than 2
years.
4.2.8 Inputs to the Gas Flow Computer:
4.2.8.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of accepting the following inputs as
required by the process / application:
• 4 – 20 mA signals
• Pulse inputs
• Digital inputs
• RTD inputs
• 0 – 5 V signals
The specific inputs that are to be connected to the Gas Flow Computer shall be
as per the P & IDs.
4.2.9 Outputs from the Gas Flow Computer:
4.2.9.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of generating the following outputs:
• 4 – 20 mA analog signals for communication with TIC
• Digital signals for communication with TIC
• RS–232 output port for communication with data logger, wherever provided
The specific outputs that are required from the Gas Flow Computer shall be as
per the P & IDs and the process requirements.
4.2.10 Display Requirements:
4.2.10.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall provide 2 lines of alphanumeric display with 16
characters per line as minimum. The display shall be LCD type.
4.2.10.2 The Gas Flow Computer unit shall have a user-friendly keypad for selection of
functions and displays. Calling up a function or a display shall not require
more than 3 key presses. The keypad shall suitable for performing simple
programming / customization of the Gas Flow Computer software. It shall be
possible to configure certain keys on the keypad for launching quick functions.
4.2.11 Self Diagnostics:
4.2.11.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of performing self-diagnostics of the
electronics and of the software. It shall also provide relevant error display.
4.3 TYPES OF GAS FLOW COMPUTERS:
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3210
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai GAS FLOW Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 COMPUTER Page # 5 of 6

4.3.1 The Gas Flow Computer may be either Wall-Mounted or Field-Mounted.


4.3.2 The Wall Mounted Gas Flow Computer shall be mounted in the TIC room, i.e.
safe area.
4.3.3 The Field Mounted Gas Flow Computer shall generally be mounted as per the
approved area classification on the platform. The Field Mounted Gas Flow
Computer may be of the following types:
• With integral solar cells: This type of Field Mounted Gas Flow Computer
shall be provided where power availability is a constraint.
• Without integral solar cells: This type of Field Mounted Gas Flow Computer
shall be provided where power is available from the existing / new power
supply system.
4.3.4 In case the Field Mounted Gas Flow Computer has to cater to only one set of
flow parameters (i.e. 1 Differential Pressure value, 1 Upstream Pressure Value
and 1 Temperature value for compensation), then a Gas Flow Computer with
integral multi-variable sensor may be used. In this case, the temperature
transmitter shall not be in the scope of supply of the Gas Flow Computer
vendor. The maximum DP range of the Multi Variable Sensor shall be 150-
inch water column. The static pressure range shall be 500-psi maximum. The
process connection shall be 1/2” NPTF vertical plane bottom connection.
4.4 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
4.4.1 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of archiving data for a minimum of
15 (fifteen) days for a minimum of 15 (fifteen) points.
4.4.2 The time interval of data capturing / frequency of data logging shall be user-
programmable with standard 1 hour, 10 minutes and 1 minute intervals.
4.4.3 The Gas Flow Computer shall be capable of providing data of trends displays
over user selectable time base.
4.4.4 The Gas Flow Computer shall have facility for changing the range selection,
multiplication factor, etc.
4.5 MATERIAL:
4.5.1 The material requirements for Gas Flow Computer shall in general be
according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.
4.5.2 The enclosure material of the Gas Flow Computer shall be Manufacturer
standard. However, it shall be certified for use in classified area if the Gas
Flow Computer used in field-mounted type.
4.5.3 Wherever a multi-variable sensor type Gas Flow Computer is used, the material
of the sensor shall be compatible with the process fluid and shall be SS 316
minimum. Wherever the process demands NACE compliance, the same shall
be provided. The process flanges for the multivariable sensor shall be CS
minimum.
4.6 ACCURACY:
4.6.1 The accuracy of the Gas Flow Computer shall be ± 0.1% or better.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3210
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 3
11 - High, Mumbai GAS FLOW Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 COMPUTER Page # 6 of 6

ANNEXURE –I TYPICAL DATA SHEET

GAS FLOW COMPUTER

UNITS: Flow Liquid – M3/HR. Gas – NM3/HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Display Capability:
a) Instantaneous Flow Data Yes / No
b) Compensated Flow Data Yes / No
GENERAL
c) Cumulative Flow Data Yes / No
d) Compensation Parameters Yes / No
e) Others (Specify)
3 Wall Mounted Yes / No
4 Field Mounted Yes / No
TYPE OF GAS FLOW
a) With Integral Solar Cell Array Yes / No
COMPUTER b) Without Integral Solar Cell Array Yes / No
c) With Integral Multi Variable Sensor Yes / No
5 Display:
a) No. of lines of display
GAS FLOW
b) No. of characters per line
COMPUTER
c) Alphanumeric display Yes / No
CHARACTERISTICS
6 Programmable Keypad Yes / No
7 Self Diagnostics Yes / No
8 Power Supply
Rechargeable /
9 Battery Back-Up Type
POWER SUPPLY & Permanent
BATTERY BACK-UP 10 If Permanent Battery, life of battery
11 One set of spare battery provided Yes / No
12 If Rechargeable Battery, Battery Charger provided Yes / No
13 4 – 20 mA signal (mention quantity of such i/ps)
14 Pulse inputs (mention no. of such i/ps)
INPUT TO GAS 15 Digital inputs (mention no. of such i/ps)
FLOW COMPUTER 16 RTD inputs (mention no. of such i/ps)
17 0 – 5 V signal (mention no. of such i/ps)
18 Others, if any, with no. of such i/ps
19 4 – 20 mA signal (mention no. of such o/ps)
OUTPUT FROM GAS 20 Digital inputs (mention no. of such o/ps)
FLOW COMPUTER 21 RS-232 port
22 Others, if any, with no. of such o/ps
23 No. of days for which data can be stored
DATA ARCHIVING
24 Frequency of data logging permissible
25 Enclosure
MATERIAL
26 Multi Variable Sensor, if provided
ENCLOSURE 27 Rating
ACCURACY 28 Gas Flow Computer Accuracy
29 Fluid State
30 Flow Min. Maximum
31 Flow Normal
32 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
SERVICE 33 Temperature Operating Maximum
CONDITIONS 34 Sp. Gr. At Oper. Temp.
35 Molecular Weight
36 Operating Viscosity (Cp)
37 Allowable pressure drop
38 Corrosive Content
39 IS Certification
40 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS
41 Model Number
42 Remarks
NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 1 OF 7

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLOW COMPUTER

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 2 OF 7

CONTENTS

Sl.No. ITEM PAGE NO.

1 Scope of this Document 3

2 Codes & Standards 3

3 Scope Of Supply 4

4 Flow Computer 4

4.1 Purpose 4

4.2 General Requirements 4

4.3 Diagnostics 6

4.4 Accuracy 6

Annexure - I Data Sheet 7

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 3 OF 7

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:

1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection of
Flow Computer for the intended purpose.

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:

2.1 The following codes and standards (latest edition) are referenced to and make a part of this
specification.
Numbers Description
AGA -3 Orifice Metering Of Natural Gas And Other Related Hydrocarbon
Fluids
AGA-Report 7 Report No. 7, Measurement of Gas by Turbine Meters,
AGA-8 Compressibility factor of Natural Gas and other related Hydrocarbon
Gases
AGA- Report 9 Measurement of Natural Gas by Ultrasonic Meter
AGA- Report 10 Speed of Sound in Natural Gas & other related Hydrocarbon Gas,
May2003
AGA-Report 11 Measurement of Natural Gas by Coriolis Meter
API MPMS 11.1 Physical Properties Data Section 1—Temperature and Pressure Volume
Correction Factors for Generalized Crude Oils, Refined Products, and
Lubricating Oils
API MPMS Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards Chapter 12—Calculation
Chapter 12 of Petroleum Quantities
API MPMS 21.1 Flow measurement using electronic metering system section-1
Electronic gas measurement
API MPMS 21.2 Flow measurement using electronic metering system section-2 - Inferred
mass.
ASTM D 1250 Standard Guide for Use of the Petroleum Measurement Tables
ISO 5167 Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential devices
ISO 5168: 1998 Measurement of fluid flow – Evaluation of Uncertainties.
ISO 6976 Natural gas - Calculation of calorific values, density, relative density
and Wobbe index from composition
ISO 10723 Natural Gas-Performance Evaluation for On-line Analytical Systems

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 4 OF 7

2.2 Reference Documents and Specifications:


a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs / Process Design Criteria / Process Instrumentation Data Sheets

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the Basic
Bid Work and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Flow Computer suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for
shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation &
commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in conjunction with the Instrument Design
Criteria.

4.0 FLOW COMPUTER:

4.1 PURPOSE:
4.1.1 The purpose of Flow Computer is to perform flow calculations, data archival, data retrieval and
data transmission to the required destination.
4.1.2 For Gases, Flow Computer shall be used obtaining compensated flow, instantaneous flow,
cumulative flow and compensation parameters (Pressure and Temperature), Molecular
weight , & Totalized flow ( Mass / Volume ).
4.1.3 For Liquids , Flow Computer shall be used for obtaining uncompensated flow , Compensated
flow , Instantaneous Flow , Compensation Parameters (Temperature, Viscosity) , Density ,
Totalized flow ( Mass / Volume ) and Net Oil and water cut, wherever applicable.

4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

4.2.1 Flow Computer shall be wall mounted or field mounted in case of Unmanned Platforms and
for Process Platform flow computer shall be Panel mounted in Central Control Room.
4.2.2 Wall Mounted Flow Computer shall be mounted in the TIC room on unmanned platforms. It
shall have an enclosure suitable for use in safe area with rating of IP 54.
4.2.3 Field Mounted Flow Computer shall be provided with an enclosure with NEMA 4 X or
equivalent rating and shall be certified for use in hazardous area by a statutory body as
defined in Clause 3.6.4.4.5 of Instrumentation Design criteria. Necessary certifications shall
be attached with Purchase Specification.
4.2.4 Field Mounted Flow Computer can be of the following types:

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 5 OF 7

• With integral solar cells: This type of Field Mounted Flow Computer shall be provided
where power availability is a constraint.
• Without integral solar cells: This type of Field Mounted Flow Computer shall be
provided where power is available from the existing / new power supply system.
4.2.5 In case the Field Mounted Flow Computer (for Gas application) has to cater to only one set
of flow parameters (i.e. 1 Differential Pressure value, 1 Upstream Pressure Value and 1
Temperature value for compensation), then MVT with flow computation capability can be
used. Separate RTD shall be provided for process temperature compensation.
4.2.6 Wherever Flow Computer with integral multi-variable sensors is used, material of sensors
shall be compatible with the process fluid and shall be SS 316 minimum. Wherever the
process demands NACE compliance, the same shall be provided.
4.2.7 For field mounting, mounting accessories required for Flow Computer shall be 316SS or
better. All Instrument supports for installation shall be galvanized.
4.2.8 Flow Computer shall be capable of archiving data for a minimum of 15 (fifteen) days for a
minimum of 10 (Ten) parameters.
4.2.9 The time interval of data capturing / frequency of data logging shall be user-programmable
with standard 1 hour, 10 minutes and 1 minute intervals.
4.2.10 Flow Computer shall be capable of providing data of trends displays over user selectable
time base.
4.2.11 Flow Computer shall have facility for changing the range selection, multiplication factor.
4.2.12 Necessary software shall be provided with the flow computer as per application.

4.2.13 Power Supply:

4.2.13.1 Flow Computer shall operate on 24 V DC supply.


4.2.13.2 Flow Computer shall have Li-ion or equivalent permanent battery back-up with battery life
for three years continuous operation of data archival etc.

4.2.14 Inputs to Flow Computer:

4.2.14.1 The Flow Computer shall be capable of accepting the following inputs:
• 4 – 20 mA signals ( HART)
• Pulse inputs
• Digital inputs
• RTD inputs
• 0 – 5 V signals
• Serial input (RS 232, RS 485, and Modbus) for gas molecular weight / liquid density

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 6 OF 7

Specific inputs that are to be connected to Flow Computer shall be as per P & IDs and
process requirement.

4.2.15 Outputs from Flow Computer:

4.2.15.1 Flow Computer shall be capable of generating following outputs:


• 4 – 20 mA analog signals
• Digital signals
• RS-232C / RS 485 Modbus or Ethernet TCP/IP protocol for RTU / DCS

The specific outputs that are required from Flow Computer shall be as per P & IDs and
process requirements.

4.2.16 Display Requirements:

4.2.16.1 Flow Computer shall have in general two displays with LCD backlit screens, one resettable
for indicating instantaneous flow, compensated flow and compensation parameters
(minimum 6 digit) and other non resettable ( min 8 digits).
4.2.16.2 Flow computer shall have facility to configure engineering units required for display as per
requirement. Flow Computer unit shall have a user-friendly keypad for selection of
functions and displays. Calling up a function or a display shall not require more than 3 key
presses. The keypad shall suitable for performing simple programming / customization of
Flow Computer software. It shall be possible to configure certain keys on keypad for
launching quick functions.

4.3 DIAGNOSTICS:

4.3.1 Flow Computer shall be capable of performing self-diagnostics of electronics and software.
It shall also provide relevant error display.
4.3.2 ‘Low battery’ indication shall be generated on LCD screen.

4.4 ACCURACY:
4.4.1 The accuracy of the Flow Computer shall be ± 0.025% or better.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Spec. No. 3211
Offshore Design Section
Functional Specifications Rev. No. 4
Engineering Services
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2000 FLOW COMPUTER
Page: 7 OF 7

ANNEXURE – I : DATA SHEET FOR FLOW COMPUTER

FLOW COMPUTER
UNITS: Flow Liquid – M3/HR. Gas – NM3/HR. Pressure – Kg/cm2 Temperature – oC Level/Length - M
1 Tag Number
2 Display Capability:
a) Instantaneous Flow Data Yes / No
b) Compensated Flow Data Yes / No
GENERAL
c) Cumulative Flow Data Yes / No
d) Compensation Parameters Yes / No
e) Others (Specify)
3 Control Panel Mounted Yes / No
Wall Mounted
TYPE OF FLOW 4 Field Mounted Yes / No
a) With Integral Solar Cell Array Yes / No
COMPUTER b) Without Integral Solar Cell Array Yes / No
c) With Integral Multi Variable Sensor Yes / No
5 Display:
a) No. of lines of display
FLOW COMPUTER b) No. of characters per line
CHARACTERISTICS c) Alphanumeric display Yes / No
6 Programmable Keypad Yes / No
7 Diagnostics Yes / No
8 Power Supply
9 Battery Back-Up Type
POWER SUPPLY &
10 If Permanent Battery, life of battery
BATTERY BACK-UP
11
12
13 4 – 20 mA signal (mention quantity of such I/O)
14 Pulse inputs (mention no. of such I/O)
INPUT TO FLOW 15 Digital inputs (mention no. of such I/O)
COMPUTER 16 RTD inputs (mention no. of such I/O)
17 0 – 5 V signal (mention no. of such I/O)
18 Serial inputs/Others, if any, with comm., protocol
19 4 – 20 mA signal (mention no. of such I/O)
OUTPUT FROM FLOW 20 Digital outputs (mention no. of such I/O)
COMPUTER 21 Communication Port (i.e. RS-232, etc.)with protocol
22 Others, if any, with no. of such I/O
23 No. of days for which data can be stored
DATA ARCHIVING
24 Frequency of data logging permissible
25 Enclosure
MATERIAL
26 Multi Variable Sensor, if provided
ENCLOSURE 27 Rating
ACCURACY 28 Flow Computer Accuracy
29 Fluid State
30 Flow Min. Maximum
31 Flow Normal
32 Inlet Pressure Operating Maximum
33 Temperature Operating Maximum
SERVICE CONDITIONS
34 Sp. Gr. at Oper. Temp.
35 Molecular Weight
36 Operating Viscosity (CP)
37 Allowable pressure drop
38 Corrosive Content
39 IS Certification
40 Manufacturer
ITEM DETAILS
41 Model Number
42 Remarks

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004B ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 2 of 11

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 4
4.0 Multipath Ultrasonic Flow Meter 4
4.1 Meter body 4
4.2 Ultra sonic transducer 5
4.3 Accuracy & Repeatability 7
4.4 Output / input 8
4.5 Electrical safety design requirement 8
4.6 Calibration 8
4.7 Diagnostics 9
4.8 Miscellaneous 9
Annexure I Data Sheet Format 11

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 3 of 11

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Multipath Ultrasonic Flow meter for the intended gas or Liquid
services.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Process & Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) The following codes and standards ( latest edition ) are referenced to and make
a part of this specification.

Number Description

AGA 8 Gas Transmission Measurement Committee Report No. 8, 1992 –


Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas and Other Related
Hydrocarbon Gases
Gas Transmission Measurement Committee Report No. 9,1998 -
AGA 9
Measurement of Gas by Multi-path Ultrasonic Meter
AGA 10 Speed of Sound in Natural Gas and Other Related Hydrocarbon
Gases, May 2003

API MPMS Chapter 1 Vocabulary


Chapter 4 Proving system
Chapter 5 Metering

IEC 529 Degree of protection provided by the enclosures

IEC 801 Electromagnetic compatibility of industrial process measurement


and control equipment

IEC 79 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmosphere.

ISO / TR Measurement of fluid flow – Evaluation of Uncertainties”


5168: 1998
ISO 10723 Natural gas ~ Performance Evaluation for On-line Analytical
Systems

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 4 of 11

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Multipath Ultrasonic Flow
meter suitable for in line Gas /Liquid Measurement for the intended application,
its procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment,
along with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation &
commissioning at site.

4.0 MULTIPATH ULTRASONIC FLOW METER:


GENERAL:
The meter shall be suitable for the intended application as described in the scope
of work like for the custody application (gas/liquid), process flow (gas/liquid) &
flare gas measurement. Wherever the meter is called for custody application, the
meter shall be ‘inline’ / multipath (minimum 04 path) meters as per AGA-9.
All electrical instruments shall be suitable for the Hazardous area classification
(Class I, Division I, Group D, T3 Hazardous Area) and certified by bodies such as
IEC / FM / UL / CENELEC / BASEEFA / CSA / DGMS / PTB / CMRI for use in
hazardous area specified. Clause 3.6.4.4.5 of Instrumentation design criteria shall
be followed for hazardous application.
4.1 METER BODY

4.1.1 MAXIMUM & MINIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE


The maximum operating pressure shall meet the requirement of the pipeline
flanges. The maximum design operating pressure of the meter should be the
lowest of the maximum design operating pressure of the following: meter body,
flanges, transducer connections, transducer assemblies.
For gas services, Meter at minimum operating line pressure shall meet the
requirement of a minimum gas density ( a function of pressure) for the proper
functioning of ultrasonic transducers .

4.1.2 CORROSION RESISTANCE


All wetted parts of the meter shall be compatible with process fluid; the wetted
parts shall be minimum of SS-316. All external parts shall be made up of
noncorrosive material or sealed with corrosion resistant material. MOC must be
selected based on the harsh offshore conditions.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 5 of 11

4.1.3 METER BODY LENGTHS AND BORES


The meter body lengths and bore shall be as per AGA-9 /API Ch 5.8 , Dowel
pins must be required on the upstream meter runs to ensure the USM is aligned
correctly to the upstream meter run, in the event the USM is removed for
maintenance. For bi-directional applications, both ends of the meter should be
considered “upstream.”
4.1.4 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER PORTS
Transducer ports shall be designed in a way that reduces the possibility of liquids
or solids accumulating in the transducer ports. It should be possible to replace the
ultrasonic transducers without depressurizing the meter run suitable proviosn
must be kept for the same.
4.1.5 PRESSURE TAP
At least one pressure tap shall be provided for measuring the static pressure in
the meter, other requirements shall be as per AGA-9/ API Ch 5.8 (for liquid).
4.1.6 MISCELLANEOUS
The straight length comprising the upstream and downstream meter tube pipe
sections shall be considered straight when the deviation from a straight line does
not exceed 0.4% over the length of the meter tube.
Steps in adjacent pipe sections, changes in the internal diameters and protrusions
upstream and downstream of the meter spool shall be avoided since these will
create local disturbances to the velocity profile. Profiler and spools used shall be
sized to meet the full bore flow in the meter.
The ultrasonic metering system shall be provided with full diagnostics and user
interface.
The Meter’s cross sectional area, the interior of the meter tube assembly shall be
clean at all times to avoid accumulation of deposits due to a mixture of dirt, mill
scale, liquids or lubricating oils shall. The vendor shall provide filter / filtration
system as per process requirements.
The meter should be designed in such a way that the body will not roll when
testing on a smooth surface with a slope up to 10%. This is to prevent any
damage to ultrasonic meter while it is dismounted for maintenance. The meter
should be designed to permit easy and safe handling of the meter during
transportation and installation. Hoisting eyes or clearance for lifting straps should
be provided.
4.2 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER:

4.2.1 The Ultrasonic meter shall be based on multipath technology using non reflective
type technology. The sizing shall be done for the given process conditions as per
AGA-9 (latest edition)/ API Ch 5.8 and full sizing calculations for the same
shall be submitted.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 6 of 11

Sizing shall be done including the minimum inlet operating pressure and gas
composition and other process conditions. Meter shall be inherently bidirectional,
however where application requires bidirectional meters, the downstream run shall
be identical to upstream run as per applicable standards. For custody transfer
application the meter shall be minimum ‘four path’.
4.2.2 It shall be possible to replace or relocate transducers in-situ under the line operating
conditions without a significant change in meter performance. After an exchange of
transducers and a possible change of the associated software constants, the resulting
shift in the meter's performance should not be more than the allowable repeatability
of the meter as per relevant standards.
4.2.3 For multi path meters, loss of one path (1 pair of transducers) shall generate an alarm
, but continue to operate , it should not result in shift of accuracy. During the
working of the meter with loss of one path or due to any component change the
overall accuracy shall be maintained within accuracies specified in the AGA-9.
Vendor to provide documentary evidence from certifying agency to substantiate the
same.
4.2.4 The vendor shall comprehensively advise the impact of transducer failure on the
performance & accuracy of the USM with documentation.
4.2.5 Electronics (signal processing unit etc.), computer programs (i.e. firmware, software,
diagnostic features etc.) shall be designed and tested as per relevant codes and
standards. Documentary proof for the same shall be submitted to the company for
review.
4.2.6 The Installation requirements and piping configuration shall be selected to meet the
performance requirements as mentioned in the AGA-9 and in this specification.
Algorithm used in their electronic for computation of average velocity and flow
profile/ wall roughness correction etc. for achieving the specified accuracy,
including the Ultrasonic Flow meter sizing velocity calculation shall be submitted to
company for review and approval.
4.2.7 The data sheets for the associated instrumentation used shall be submitted to the
company for review.
4.2.8 Ultrasonic flow meter and accessories operation shall be protected from
electromagnetic exposure / interference. The electromagnetic compatibility shall be
as per IEC-801.
4.2.9 Ultrasonic flow meter spool inside diameter to meet the specified I.D. and internal
surface roughness shall be as per relevant codes and standards.
4.2.10 External body shall be blast cleaned to near white metal as per international
standard and primed with inorganic zinc premier (two coats each of 40 micron
minimum dry film thickness) and the final coat epoxy paint of 40 micron dry film
thickness.
4.2.11 The transducer/ probes shall be of robust construction for uninterrupted long life
and accurate performance. The transducer / probe shall be hermetically sealed type,
electroplated with suitable material so as to perform under dirty gas condition also.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 7 of 11

4.3 ACCURACY & REPEATABILITY


4.3.1 Ultrasonic Flow meters shall meet the following requirements for Accuracy /
Repeatability / Uncertainties over and above the requirements mentioned in the relevant
codes and standards for the range 20% to 100% of the flow:
a) For Custody Transfer Applications:
I. Meter Repeatability shall be +/- 0.2% for the flow range as per the process
requirements.
II. Meter for custody transfer application shall have accuracy of +/- 0.3% or better
(including uncertainty) before any calibration adjustment.
III. Meter shall be supplied in (1+1) x100% each or in (2+1) x 50%.
IV. In addition to the configuration above, a Master Meter shall be provided in form of
Turbine Flow Meter / Ultrasonic Flow Meter for indirect proving of the ‘stream’ of
ultrasonic flow meters (meant for custody transfer application).
V. Stream Flow computer shall be provided with each meter run, capable of accepting data
from proving computer for calibration purposes. Master flow meter shall have proving
computer capable of providing all the data for all the meter runs associated with the
metering system.
VI. The total energy system uncertainty shall be less than +/- 0.7% of energy flow rate. The
accuracy should be total system uncertainty based on ISO / TR 5168: 1998
“Measurement of fluid flow – Evaluation of uncertainties”. The calculation including
both the systematic and random errors taking in to account the certified heating value of
GC calibration gas shall be submitted.
VII. The pressure and temperature uncertainties to be included in the calibration should
consist of the transmitter uncertainty and calibration / validation equipment
uncertainties. The uncertainty of the ultrasonic flow meter including both the meter
repeatability as well a laboratory uncertainty shall not exceed +/- 0.3% of the flow rate.
VIII. Calibration shall be done at reputed flow laboratories like NEL or equivalent. Complete
Metering System for Custody transfer shall be certified by NMI / PTB / CEESI /
TransCanada, and shall meet the statutory requirements of OIML.
b) For ‘measurement system’ involving ultrasonic flow meter for other than custody
transfer application, accuracy shall be +/- 0.5% or better including uncertainties.
Uncompensated and Compensated flow values shall be available in the flow computer
provided along with the meter.
c) For the ‘in line’ flare gas measurement, suitable ultrasonic type meters shall be
provided with an accuracy of +/- 3 % or better. ‘Turn down’ ratio for measurement in
the meter shall be as per the process requirements with a ratio of 1: 1000 as a minimum.
In case of loss of one path for Multipath insertion type ultrasonic meter for flare gas
measurement, system shall generate alarm for path failure and shall continue its
operation within the accuracy.
4.3.2 Vendor shall include wet flow calibration to achieve specified accuracy for custody transfer
applications. Vendor shall confirm with back-up test results/ documentation, the long-term

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 8 of 11

stability of measurement accuracy, duly taking into consideration that the pipe wall roughness
is expected to change over the period.
4.4 OUTPUT / INPUTS
4.4.1 The meter shall have at least one serial data interface (RS-232 / RS-485).
4.4.2 Standard Frequency output(s) representing flow rate at line conditions. (Frequency output
shall be electrically out of phase by 90 deg for pulse integrity check).
4.4.3 The meter shall have Analog (4-20mA, DC) output for flow rate at line conditions.
4.4.4 Flow should be scalable up to 120% of the meter’s maximum flow rate , a programmable
low cut off function shall be provided that sets the flow rate output to zero when the
indicated flow rate is below a minimum value ( not applicable to serial data output). Two
separate flow rate outputs and a bidirectional state output or serial data values should be
provided for bi-directional applications to facilitate the separate accumulation of volumes
by the associated flow computer , and provide bi directional state output signal.
4.4.5 All the outputs shall be isolated from the ground and have necessary voltage protection to
meet electronics design testing requirements as per relevant codes and standards.

4.5 ELECTRICAL SAFETY DESIGN REQUIREMNTS


4.5.1 The Ultrasonic Meter including the signal processing unit (SPU), shall be intrinsically safe
design and explosion proof enclosure design for use in Class I , Division I area and shall be
certified by an statutory authority .
4.6 CALIBRATION
4.6.1 The vendor shall test each transducer or pair of transducers and document the results as
part of the USMs quality assurance program. Each transducer shall be marked or tagged
with a permanent serial number and be provided with a transducer data pack. If the signal-
processing unit (SPU) requires specific transducer characterization parameters, each
transducer or transducer pair, shall also be provided with test documentation that contains
the specific calibration test data, calibration method used and characterization
parameter(s).
4.6.2 The calibration shall be made over a statistically significant number of runs and over a
range of flow velocities. As a minimum, calibration shall be carried out for at least 6
velocities, logarithmically spaced over the meter range, taking the mean of at least three
measurements, of 100 seconds, at each velocity. In the lower part of the range, the number
of measurements may be increased to 5 or 10. In determining the number of repeat points
at each flow condition, the variability of the instrument under test should be considered, so
that the random errors are sufficiently averaged and the remaining difference with respect
to the calibration standard is predominantly the bias of the instrument under test.

4.6.3 The ultrasonic meter must be flow calibrated in general as per the AGA 9. The flow
calibration shall be performed at the following test flow rates as a minimum : at Qmin ,
0.10 Qmax , 0.25 Qmax, 0.50 Qmax, 0.75 Qmax and at Qmax.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 9 of 11

A detailed report of the flow calibration test shall be submitted to the Company for
review.
4.6.4 The algorithms and data used for computation of average velocity and flow profile /
wall roughness correction etc. for achieving the specified accuracy shall be submitted to
the company.

4.7 DIAGNOSTICS

4.7.1 The Ultrasonic flow meter shall provide the following diagnostic requirements as a
minimum via RS-232 / RS-485 serial data interface from the meter to the Operator
Console / Flow Computer / Station Computer / etc., as specified in the Basic Bid Work :
• Average axial velocity through the meter.
• Gas / Liquid velocity for each acoustic path
• Corrected and uncorrected volumetric flow rate
• Speed of sound along each acoustic path
• Average speed of sound
• Velocity sampling intervals
• Average time intervals
• % of accepted pulses for each acoustic path
• Status and measurement quality indicators
• Alarm failure indictors & other Diagnostic data

4.8 MISCELLANEOUS

4.8.1 The vendor shall specify the flow rate limits for qmin, qt, and qmax, for the selected
USM size and type, as detailed in relevant codes and standard.
4.8.2 As a minimum, flow conditioners shall be 316 stainless steel of between-flanges.
These shall comply with the requirements as per relevant codes and standard.
4.8.3 Where flow conditioners are recommended, care must be taken to select flow
conditioners that do not generate acoustic noise with harmonic frequencies that
may interfere with the USM performance.
4.8.4 Cast body of the ultrasonic meter shall be preferred compared to the welded body
for better immunity from vibration, reduced corrosion and better internal surface
of the meter, as well as negligible impact due to pressure and temperature.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 10 of 11

4.8.5 All the meters shall be tested based on testing requirements mentioned in the
AGA-9 / relevant codes and standards. The certificates including the detailed test
report shall be submitted for company’s review along with purchase
specification.
4.8.6 In addition to the requirements mentioned in the instrument design criteria
3.6.6.1, the multipath ultrasonic flow meter shall have all the information tagged
as per AGA-9 on a Stainless steel tag plate.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Offshore Design Section Spec No. 3212
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev. No. 01(a)
ISO 9001: 2008 ULTRASONIC FLOW Discipline Instrumentation
METER Page 11 of 11

UNITS: Flow→ Liquid M3/Hr Gas→ M3/Hr Steam → Kg/Hr Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G Temp→ 0C Level / Length→ mm
1. Qty
2. Service
3. Manufacturer
4. PI & D No.
Service Conditions
1. Fluid
2. State
3. Minimum gas velocity
4. Flow Min/nom/max m3/h
5. Pressure (Min/ Nor/ Max) Bar
6. Temperature C Nor/ Des
7. Design Pressure Barg
8. SG or Density (Typical)
9. Area Electrical Classification
10. Line Size
Flow Meter/ Transducer
1. Tag No./Model No.
2. Type
3. Size & End Connection/Rating
4. Wetted Parts
5. Mounting
6. Pressure Drop @ Max Flow
7. Face to Face Dimension
8. Transducer Material
9. Transducer construction
10. Electrical protection
11. Pressure Tapping
12. Testing
Flow Transmitter
1. Tag No./Model No.
2. Type
3. Input Power
4. Calibration Range
5. Output Signal (Note 1)
6. Gross Volume Flow Accuracy (Note 2 & 3)
7. Input signal
8. Housing ( Enclosure class)
9. Direct connectivity with on-line Gas Chromatograph
10. Manual entry of gas composition
11. AGA- 8 Calculations
12. Serial Communication port
13. Communication Protocol
Accessories
1. Flow conditioner
2. Pressure transmitter
3. Temperature Probe/ transmitter
4. Flow computer
5. Third party certification
6. Flow Calibration

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/23 ODS/SOP/17 01 00 21.07.2010
Design Division Spec # 3213
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai ELECTRO-MAGNETIC Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 FLOW METER Page # 1 of 6

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

ELECTRO-MAGNETICFLOW METER

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3213
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai ELECTRO-MAGNETIC Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 FLOW METER Page # 2 of 6

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference documents and Specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Electro-Magnetic Flow meter 3
4.1 Application 3
4.2 General 3
4.3 Material 5
4.4 Meter Selection 5
4.5 Miscellaneous 5
Annexure I Data Sheet Format 6

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3213
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai ELECTRO-MAGNETIC Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 FLOW METER Page # 3 of 6

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Electro-Magnetic Flow Meter for the intended process application .
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs / Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work and P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Electro-Magnetic Flow
meter suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing,
testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and
assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site.
3.3 The Electro-Magnetic Flow Meter Assembly shall include sensors electrode sub
assembly, converters, pre-amplifier / transmitter, indicator, totalizer and all the
accessories necessary to make the measurement system complete.
4.0 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC FLOW METERS:
4.1 Application:
4.1.1 Electro-Magnetic Flow Meters shall be used as the flow-measuring system element
wherever dictated by the process requirements.
4.2 General:
4.2.1 The Electro-Magnetic flow meters shall be provided with flanged end connections
primarily as per ANSI B 16.5, the rating and facing of which shall be as per the
piping specifications.
4.2.2 The flow direction shall be clearly stamped or cast on the body to avoid polarity
errors. Meter shall have forward & reverse measurement functions and reverse
flow shall be confirmed by status output / indication.
4.2.3 Meter signal / power cable entry shall be ½” / ¾” NPTF respectively, as per ANSI
B 2.1.
4.2.4 As a minimum, Transmitter shall be ‘SMART’ type, 4 – 20 mA / HART output with a
local indicator. In addition, the meter shall be capable of providing the output in other
required form (pulse, serial, contact, etc.).
4.2.5 The meter’s enclosure housing the electrical parts, shall be suitable for the
hazardous area classification. Unless otherwise specified, the enclosure shall be
Explosion Proof (NEMA 7) & Weather proof to NEMA 4X /IP 65 or better. The
whole system shall be certified by a statutory body (like FM / UL / BASEEFA /
PTB / CMRI /DGMS). The vendor shall furnish certificate(s) for the same.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3213
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai ELECTRO-MAGNETIC Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 FLOW METER Page # 4 of 6

4.2.6 The Electro-Magnetic Meter’s field coils shall be hermetically sealed. Coil
insulation shall be class F suitable for high temperature. Suitable grounding type
system and material shall be selected for the metering element.

4.2.7 Field coils may operate on the alternating supply voltage. Replaceable electrodes /
Frequency excitation methods are also acceptable where the magnetic flow meter
is operated on AC / DC voltages. Vendor shall indicate the power supply
requirements and furnish the power consumption for the meter (sensor, transmitter,
display, etc.) along with the sizing calculations for the selected meter. Standard
Signal types and communication protocols shall be offered. Appropriate EMI / RFI
protection for the meter shall be considered.
4.2.8 Meter shall not necessarily be of the line size indicated in the P&ID, but shall be
sized for range of flow regime and the conductivity /velocity requirement desired
for the meter. However, the meter shall be ‘Full bore’ meter with respect to its
meter run. Straight run requirement shall be sized as per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Meeting the flow profile requirement for the meter by providing
necessary straighteners / flow conditioners etc., shall be vendor’s responsibility.
4.2.9 Magnetic Flow Meter shall be Microprocessor based system, in explosion proof
housing. Meter shall have a non-volatile memory for data access and data transfer
to remote controllers / indicators / DCS. There shall be no data loss upon the loss
of the power supply to the meter.
4.2.10 Where the process fluid may result in coating of the electrodes, suitable measures /
special installation requirements to minimize such coating shall be a part of the
design consideration in selection of meters. Monitoring of such adhesions
[Electrode scaling/ Electrode corrosion], Electrode leakage, Liner deformation, gas
bubbles and solid identification, shall be a part of the meter diagnostics. Meter
shall also have diagnostics features such as incorrect installation and partial filled
meter . Electrodes shall be replaceable type.
4.2.11 Where the fluid is having low conductivity / contain solids in the streams (like
slurries containing magnetic particles), vendor shall offer system with suitable
circuitry for compensating the signal changes so induced by the permeable solids.
4.2.12 The ‘minimum’ fluid conductivity shall be specified for which the meter
performance is within specified values.
4.2.13 The configuration capabilities of the meter shall be for LCD display of indication
of actual flow rate, forward, reverse, sum total flow indications, conductivity,
temperature, status indications. The same shall be available as user selectable
parameter on the LCD display of the meter.
4.2.14 The ‘local’ 2 line, 6 ½ (min.) digit alphanumeric backlit LCD display shall be
provided ‘integral’ with the meter / transmitter and shall be easily visible from
grade.
4.2.15 Software security shall be provided in the meter. Upscale / downscale alarms &
Engineering units shall be user selectable. Programming for range , alarms, display
settings shall be possible through front face of the meter and without opening the

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3213
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai ELECTRO-MAGNETIC Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 FLOW METER Page # 5 of 6

transmitter housing in hazardous area. The programming method shall be touchpad


keys / magnetic keys / optical key.
4.2.16 Manual / Auto zeroing (nulling) facility shall be provided for the meter to offset
effects of nearby magnetic disturbances in ‘no-flow’ condition. This shall be done
from the meter front face display without opening the cover in the Hazardous area.
4.2.17 Wherever specified, a separate meter receiver with 2 line (min.) backlit LCD
indicator for instantaneous flow rate, flow totalizer and diagnostic functions shall
be shall be provided in the Control room
4.2.18 Calibration shall be 5 point ( min ) calibration unless otherwise specified and to be
carried out at an accredited lab as per Standard ISO 8316.
4.2.19 Vendor shall complete the data sheet enclosed at Annexure-I.
4.3 Material:
4.3.1 The material requirements for Electro-Magnetic Flow Meters shall in general be
according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria Internals of the
meter shall be SS-316 minimum and HASTALLOY-C for piping class ( A11 ,
B11 , C11 , D11 , E 11, F11, PA11, PB11, PD11, PE11, PF11). As a minimum, the
meter flow tube, electrodes and coil housing should be SS 316. The housing should
be fully welded. Bolted coil housing with rubber or plastic gaskets is not
acceptable for offshore installation.
4.3.2 Tube liners shall be selected to meet the process requirement and shall be proven
for the application specified in the basic bid work.
4.3.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all wetted parts of Electro-Magnetic assemblies
shall meet NACE MR-01-75 (Latest Edition) and are compatible with the process
conditions.
4.3.4 Transmitter housing and mounting accessories required for meter shall be SS 316
or better. Meter enclosure shall be suitable for hazardous area. All instrument
supports shall be galvanized type for installation.
4.4 Meter Selection:
4.4.1 Over Range: Shall be designed for an over-range of at least 130% of Max flow.
4.4.2 Accuracy: ±0.5% of the reading or better.
4.4.3 Repeatability: ±0.1%
4.5 Miscellaneous
4.5.1 The Electro-Magnetic Flow Meters shall be installed after hydro testing and line
flushing.
4.5.2 All castings and weldings (other than slip-on welds, which shall be Dye
Penetration tested) shall be 100% radio graphed.
4.5.3 Inspection, testing & calibration shall be as per the Clause 3.6.4.7 of Design
Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3213
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai ELECTRO-MAGNETIC Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 FLOW METER Page # 6 of 6

ANNEXURE – I - Typical Data Sheet For Electro-Magnetic Flow Meter


MAGNETIC FLOWMETER
Units : Flow → Liquid-M /Hr Gas → NM3/Hr, Steam → Kg/Hr, Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G, Temperature → Deg C Level/ Length→ mm
3

1. Meter Tag No.


2. Service
3. Location
4. Line Size, Sched.
5. Line Material
CONN'S
6. Connection Type
7. Connection Mat'ls
8. Tube Material SS 316
9. Liner Material PTFE or Eq. suitable for process service
10. Electrode Type Burn off/ flush /MFR Design with PTR
11. Electrode Matl. SS 316 / Hastelloy
METER
12. Meter Casing SS 316
SENSOR
13. Power Supply Elect. Code 24 V DC from transmitter
14. Grounding, Type & Matl. *
15. Accuracy ± 0.5% of measured value
16. Enclosure Class IP65 / NEMA 4X
17. Mounting Integral / Field
18. Display *
METERING
ELEMENT

19. Display parameters *


20. Outputs 4-20mA HART / Pulse /serial/ Status
21. Communication output Serial
TRANS
22. Hazardous area Approval *
MITTER
23. Enclosure Class IP65 / NEMA 4X
24. Housing SS 316
25. Programming *
26. Cable entry *
27. Diagnostic features *
28. Fluid
29. Max, Flow, Units
30. Max, Velocity, Units
31. Maximum Viscosity
32. FLUID Norm. Flow M3/hr Min. Flow M3/hr
33. Max. Temp. °C Min. Temp °C.
34. Max.Press Kg/cm g Oper.PressKg/cm2
2

35. Min. Fluid Conductivity


36. Vacuum Possibility
INSTRUM
ASSOCIA

37. Instrument Tag Number


TED

ENT

38. Power Consumption


39. Transmitter Output *
TRANS.
40. RFI/EMI Protection *
41. Manufacturer
42. Meter Model Number
43. Instrument Model Number
44. Material Certificate
45. Calibration Certificate from Accredited Lab
• * By Vendor

VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 1 of 8

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED REV.
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE
REVISED BY BY No.
PAGES
VS SRS GRP 8 18.02.2008 4

AK BK GRP 9 28.03.2007 3

AK BK GRP 9 31.09.06 2

AK MC RK 9 31.09.06 1

ET MC AC 9 25.08.2003 0
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 2 of 8

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Temperature Gauge 3
4.1 Gauge type 3
4.2 Material 3
4.3 Accuracy 4
4.4 Reading scales 4
4.5 Enclosure class 4
4.6 Thermocouple & Thermowell 4
4.7 Equipment protection 5
4.8 Miscellaneous 5
Annexure I Material Selection Chart 6
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 7
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 3 of 8

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Temperature Gauge for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Temperature gauge suitable
for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance
where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 TEMPERATURE GAUGE:
4.1 General:
4.1.1 The temperature gauges shall be used for local indication. These local temperature
indicators shall in general be heavy duty, weatherproof, dial type bi-metal
thermometers with 100mm to 150 mm dial size, external zero adjustment, every
angle rotatable and rigid stems. Liquid filled casing shall be provided for dial
thermometers.
4.1.2 Filled system dial thermometers shall be used when the operating temperature is
between 0oC (32oF) and –45oC (-50oF).
4.1.3 The Bi-metal shall be adjustable union stem type with SS 316 material for the
stem. The Union size shall be ½” NPT and the diameter shall be suit the well
diameters.
4.1.4 Dial Thermometers shall be provided with separable stainless steel thermometer
wells.
4.1.5 Filled capillary instruments shall be fully compensated for ambient temperature
and shall not be used for measurements above 420 oC. Capillary and armour shall
be stainless steel. The armour shall be flexible.
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for temperature gauges and thermowells shall in general
be according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and as per
Anexure I of this document.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 4 of 8

4.2.2 Case material for all temperature gauges shall be SS 316. Capillary and Armour
shall be of stainless steel.
4.2.3 The Window material shall be Shatter proof glass.
4.3 Range:
The range shall be selected such that the normal operating temperature shall fall in
the middle third of the span.
4.4 Accuracy:
The accuracy shall be ±1% of the span.
4.5 Reading Scales:
Indicating scales and recorder charts shall read out in degrees Celsius.
4.6 THERMOCOUPLE & THERMOWELL:
4.6.1 Thermowell shall be installed for all temperature-sensing elements installed on
process lines or vessels.
4.6.2 The thermowell shall be suitable for the process media, generally 316 SS, or other
material as required by the project piping specification. The thermowell shall be
machined from drilled bar stock with minimum wall thickness of 4.8mm, and 6mm
bore. Bore shall be concentric with the outside diameter to within 10% of wall
thickness. The thermowell shall be provided with hexagonal head.
4.6.3 (The thermowell material requirement for various piping classes shall be as per
Annexure – I of this specification)
4.6.4 Thermowell flanges shall be of stainless steel and shall be rated one piping class
higher than the pipe to which it is connected.
4.6.5 Thermometer well shall have ½” NPT female thread for element and 1½” flanged
for vessel or piping connection.
4.6.6 Thermowells to be used as test wells shall be provided with a stainless steel
screwed plug and chain.
4.6.7 Wells for insulated vessels and lines shall have extension necks.
4.6.8 The Thermowell tip shall be at centerline of pipe but immersion length shall not
exceed 400 mm for higher size pipes.
4.6.9 Thermowell shall be designed to withstand vibration stresses caused by stream
velocity. Wake frequency at maximum flow velocity shall be less than 80% of the
natural frequency of the Thermowell. The Contractor shall provide calculations to
ASME performance Test Code 19.3, Part 3: Instruments and Apparatus
temperature Measurement.
4.6.10 A thermometer well shall be installed adjacent to all flow recorder, temperature
recorder and controller measuring elements.
4.6.11 Thermowell welding shall be full penetration type with ‘U’ length as follows:
4” to 6” lines - 280 mm

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 5 of 8

Above 6” - 320 mm
Vessels - 400 mm
4.6.12 The typical thermowell installation shall be as per Annexure – II of this
specification.
4.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION:
In addition to clause no. 3.6.4.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria Gauge
following protection requirements shall in general be as per.
4.7.1 Temperature Gauges: 130% of range shall be provided as Over-range protection
for the temperature gauge. The temperature gauge shall be weather proof to NEMA
4X / IP 66
4.7.2 Thermowells: Thermowells shall be designed to withstand vibration stresses
caused by stream velocity. Wake frequency at maximum flow velocity shall be less
than 80% of the natural frequency of the Thermowell. Temperature elements
having extended lengths shall be handled with care and suitably protected to
prevent damage.
4.8 Miscellaneous:
Thermowells shall not be installed in elbows. Lagging extensions shall be
provided on insulated piping and insulated vessels. Thermowells shall be oriented
so that gauge dials are clearly visible and readable from the deck or the appropriate
access platform. Where a thermowell location causes poor access or visibility, the
Contractor shall provide a remote-mounted capillary-gauge, located in an
accessible and readily visible location.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 6 of 8

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Thermowells

Thermowell
S. No. Piping Class
Thermowell Flange
A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1, PD1,
PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2, XG1, A1H, A3,
1 B3, A8 SS 316 CARBON STEEL
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE SS 316 CARBON STEEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS 316 SS 316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

5 A7 TITANIUM TITANIUM

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N, PA1N,


6 PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS 316 SS 316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS 316 L SS 316 L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11, PD11,


8 PE11, PF11
HASTALLOY C HASTALLOY C

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 7 of 8

ANNEXURE – II
(Hook Up Drawing)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3300
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 4
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 GAUGE Page # 8 of 8

ANNEXURE – III – Typical data sheet Temperature Gauge

TEMPERATURE GUAGES
Units : Flow →Liquid-M3/Hr, Gas → Kg/Hr, Steam → Kg/Hr, Pressure → Kg/Cm2 G, Temperature → Deg C, Level/ Length →mm
1 Type :- Bimetal : Filled : Other : FILLED SYSTEM

2 Well :- Required : Not required : 14 SAMA Class :

3 Mounting :- Local : Surface : Flush : Compensation : Case : Full :

4 Dial Size :- 150 mm : Other : 15 Bulb type :

5 Colour :- White : With Black letters: Bulb Material :

6 Case Material :- Cast Aluminium : Other : 16 Bulb Union 1/2" NPT(M) : Other :
Threaded To :
7 Window Material :- Glass : Acrylic : Other : 17 Extension Type :- Rigid : Bendable: Angle :

8 Conn. Location :- Back : Bottom : 18 Bulb Dia :- Mfr. Std. : To suit well : Other :
Back Adjustable : All Angles Adjustable : 19 Capillary Material :

9 Accuracy : Armour Flexible :


10 Enclosure : Armour Material :
Enclosure Class : 20 Capillary Length :
11 Zero adj. : - Over range Protection :- 130% of range :

BIMETAL THERMOWELL
12 Stem : 21 Material : Other :
Type : Adj. Union : Threaded : 22 Construction : Driller bar Built up :
Stock
Material : Other :
Other : 23 Process Connection : 11/2" 1" NPT(M) :
flanged :
13 Stem Dia :- Mfr. Std. : Other :
Other : 24 Gauge Connection 1/2" NPT(F) Other :
To suit well : :
25 Thermowell As Per Drawing. :
26 Options : (a) SS tag plate
(b) Make / Model No. :
Tag Temp Deg C Range Well Dim Mm Flange Service Options
No. Deg C
Nor Max U T Material Rating,
face/fin.

NOTES :
1. Immersion lengths of thermo wells on vessels to be confirmed by respective vessel vendors.

□ VENDOR’S SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 1 of 8

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

TEMPERATURE SWITCHES

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED REV.
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE
REVISED BY BY No.
PAGES
VS SRS GRP 8 18.02.2008 2
ET RS GRP 10 28.03.2007 1
AK MC AC 10 13.05.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 2 of 8

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Temperature switch 3
4.1 Switch type 3
4.2 Material 4
4.3 Accuracy 4
4.4 Reading scales 4
4.5 Enclosure class 4
Annexure I Material Selection Chart 5
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 6
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 3 of 8

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Temperature Switch for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Temperature Switch
suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance
where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 TEMPERATURE SWITCH:
4.1 SWITCH TYPE:
4.1.1 Electrical type.
4.1.2 GENERAL:
4.1.2.1 The switch mechanism shall be a hermetically sealed micro-switch of SPDT,
snap action type.
4.1.2.2 The switch shall be provided with 2Nos. ½”NPT (F) cable entries. One cable
entry shall be plugged with suitable explosion-proof plug.
4.1.2.3 Temperature elements installed on process lines or vessels shall be installed in
thermo wells.
4.1.2.4 Thermo wells pressure/temperature rating shall be in accordance with ANSI B
16.5-1981.
4.1.2.5 Thermo wells shall have DN 40 RF Flange process connections for process lines
and DN50RF flange for connections to vessels. Sensor connection to thermo
wells shall be ½’’ NPT.
4.1.2.6 Stainless steel thermo well flanges shall be rated one piping class higher that the
pipe to which it is connected.
4.1.2.7 Arcing during making or breaking of switch contacts shall be minimum. The
switch contacts shall have long life and minimum wear. The material chosen for
switch contact shall have good thermal conductivity for dissipating heat.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 4 of 8

4.1.2.8 There shall be minimum bounce during making and breaking of switch contacts
and switch mechanism shall be designed to minimize the vibration.
4.1.2.9 The switch element shall be selected in such a way that it can withstand an over-
range pressure of 1.5 times maximum range without loss of calibration.
4.1.2.10 Temperature switches shall be heavy duty, with user adjustable set point.
Adjustments shall be tamper-proof.
4.1.2.11 The thermo well shall be designed to withstand vibration stresses caused by
stream velocity. Wake frequency at maximum flow velocity shall be less than
80% of the natural frequency of the thermo well.
4.1.2.12 Vendor shall ensure that set point falls between 35% and 70% of adjustable
range of the selected model in general.
4.1.2.13 Thermowells shall not be installed in elbows. All Temperature instrument shall
be mounted as close as possible to sensing point. Mountings accessories required
for Temperature Instrument shall be 316SS or better. When switches and other
devices are grouped and mounted on a instrument stand it should be in such a
manner that removal of each instrument shall be possible without the need to
disconnect, dismantle or remove any other instruments or tubing.
4.1.2.14 Temperature switch shall have tamper-proof set point adjustment. Electrical
Temperature switches shall be calibrated for there set points.
4.1.2.15 All switches shall be Ex d.
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for Temperature switch shall in general be according to
clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart
provided in Annexure II of this specification.
4.2.2 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid
and ambient conditions to which they are exposed.
4.3 Accuracy: The maximum error shall not exceed 1% of the span. Repeatability
shall be ±1%.
4.4 Reading Scales: Units for Temperature switch shall be in deg C.
4.5 Enclosure Class: In addition to weatherproof, the switch enclosure shall be
explosion-proof to NEMA-7 and certified by third party Statuary bodies like
UL/FM/BASEEFA or equal for use in hazardous area (CL 1, DIV.1, and GR.D).

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 5 of 8

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Thermowell

S. No. Piping Class Well Flange

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1,


PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2,
1 XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8 SS316 CS
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE SS316 CS

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS316 SS316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

5 A7 TITANUM TITANUM

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N,


6 PA1N, PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS316 SS316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS316L SS316L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11,


8 PD11, PE11, PF11
HASTC HASTC

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 6 of 8

ANNEXURE – II

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 7 of 8

ANNEXURE – II CONT..

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3301
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 SWITCHES Page # 8 of 8

ANNEXURE –III Typical data sheet for Temperature Switch

TEMPERATURE SWITCH
UNITS: - Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Steam – Kg/hr Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C Level/length -mm
1 Type MEASURING UNIT
2 Well 25 SAMA Class
3 Case material 25.1 Compensation
4 Mounting 26 Bulb Type
5 Enclosure 26.1 Bulb Material
Enclosure Class 26.2 Bulb Union Thread
6 Elec. Area Class 26.3 Bulb Extension Type
7 Intrinsically Safe 26.4 Bulb Dia
9 27 Capillary Materials
Power Supply for switch 28 Armour flexible
29 Armour Material
10 Accuracy 30 Capillary Length
31 Over Range protection
11 Repeatability THERMOWELL
SWITCH 32 Material
13 Electric contact 33 Construction
14 Qty. 34 Process Connection
15 FORM 35 Gauge Connection
16 TYPE 36 Thermo well as per
attached Drawing
17 Contact Rating OPTIONS
18 Load Type a) All mounting
accessories need to be
supplied.
19 Cable Entry b) Integral output meter
20 No. of Entries 37 Make
21 Set point Adj
22 Differential
TAG RANGE SET TEMPERAT WELL FLANGE SERVICE OPTIONS
No. POINT DIM.mm
NOR. MAX. U T MATERIAL #, FACE,
FINISH

NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 10 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

ANNEXURE – IV

TYPICAL DATA SHEET – TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER

TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
UNITS :- Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Steam – Kg/hr Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C Level/length -mm
1 Function MEASURING UNIT
2 Type 15 SAMA Class
3 Case 15.1 Compensation
4 Mounting 16 Bulb Type
5 Enclosure 16.1 Bulb Material
Enclosure Class 16.2 Bulb Union Thread
6 Elec. Area Class 16.3 Bulb Extension Type
7 Intrinsically Safe 16.4 Bulb Dia
8 Power Supply 17 Capillary Materials
9 Power Supply for 18 Armour flexible
Transmitter
10 Cable Entry 19 Armour Material

11 Accuracy 20 Capillary Length


12 Repeatability 21 Over Range protection
THERMOWELL
TRANSMITTER 22 Material
13 Output 23 Construction
14 Trans Power Supply 24 Process Connection
25 Gauge Connection
26 Thermowell as per
Drawing
OPTIONS

a Mount Acc for 2”


pipe
b. Integral Output
meter
TAG No. RANGE TEMPERAT WELL FLANGE SERVICE OPTIONS
DIM
NOR. MAX. U T MATERIAL RATING,
FACE,
FINISH
AS PER
P& ID
NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 2 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.

1.0 Scope of This Document 3

2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications 3

3.0 Scope of Supply 3


4.0 Temperature Transmitter 3

4.1 General 3

4.2 Thermo well 4

4.3 Accuracy 5

4.4 Repeatability 5

4.5 Output Signal 5

4.6 Material 5

4.7 Enclosure class 6

Annexure I Material Selection Chart 7

Annexure II Hook-up drawing-Thermowell 8

Annexure III Temperature Transmitter W/ Thermo well 9

Annexure IV Data Sheet Format 10

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 3 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection of
Temperature Transmitter (Electronic) for the intended service.
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
a) Instrumentation/ Process Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Instrument / Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the
Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Temperature Transmitter suitable for
measurement range, accuracy, MoC & standard accessories for its intended application.
3.3 The procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along
with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation & commissioning
at site shall be under vendor’s responsibility.
4.0 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER
4.1 General:
4.1.1 Temperature transmitters shall be integral with the sensing element assembly.
4.1.2 The sensing element shall be RTD 3 wire type or thermo couple.
4.1.3 The RTD element length shall be selected to suit the Thermowell insertion length.
4.1.4 The thermocouple characteristics shall conform to IEC 584-1 and the RTD shall be
platinum 100 ohms at 0 centigrade to relevant standard IEC 751/DIN 43760 and complete
with a flanged thermowells.
4.1.5 Welding of flange well shall be full penetration type. Weld shall be dye penetrate checked
as per BS 5500.
4.1.6 Gasket contact surface finish for RTJ flanges shall be 63 RMS (MAX) and shall confirm to
ANSI B16.5.
4.1.7 For temperature up to 350 centigrade, measurement shall be by means of platinum
resistance temperature detectors, 100 ohm at 0 centigrade to BS 1904, with RTD/current
transmitters.
4.1.8 Transmitters shall include a Digital indicator scaled in engineering units, and shall be
mounted integrally in the head of the detecting element where access permits, otherwise
remotely mounted. Where the transmitter indicator is not readily visible a separate loop-
powered indicator shall be provided. The output meter shall be suitable for use in the
hazardous area.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 4 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

4.1.9 Thermocouples shall only be used above 350 centigrade, or when it can show that the
mechanical construction of an item does not permit the fitting of an RTD.
4.1.10 Surface metal temperatures shall be measured by thermocouples secured to the surface.
4.1.11 Thermocouples shall normally be the mineral-insulated metal- sheathed type, isolated from
earth. Characteristic of mV versus temperature shall conform to BS-4937.
4.1.12 Thermocouples shall be Type K (Chromel-Alumel) for the temperature range –20 degree
centigrade to 1000 degree centigrade. For temperature above 1000 degree centigrade, Type
R (Platinum/13 % Rhodium-Platinum) shall be used.
4.1.13 Transmitters shall be “SMART” type and use HART protocol for communication.
4.1.14 Transmitters shall be immune to Radio frequency interference due to walkie-talkie, paging
system, communication system etc. All electronic modules shall be designed for short
circuit protection.
4.1.15 Span shall be continuously adjustable over the transmitter range.
4.1.16 The TT shall be provided with ½”NPT (F) cable entries.
4.1.17 The change in out put due to change in ambient temperature should be very minimum.
4.1.18 The range shall be selected so that the normal operating temperature shall fall in the middle
third of the span.
4.1.19 Contractor shall submit wake frequency calculation as per PTC 19.3 for review. In case the
wake frequency exceeds 80% of natural frequency the recommended changes in length and
wall thickness of well, as per PTC 19.3 shall be submitted for approval.
4.1.20 TT shall have adjustable zero and span. Setting adjustment shall have locking
arrangement.
4.1.21 Over range protection shall be 130% of range.
4.1.22 All Transmitter instrument shall be mounted as close as possible to sensing point.
Mountings accessories required for Temperature Instrument shall be 316SS or better.
4.1.23 All the Temperature Transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and certified by statutory body
like UL/FM/BASEEFA/CMRI/DGMS or equivalent. The certificate for the same shall be
provided with the Purchase Specification.
4.1.24 TT Housing shall be Dual Compartment Type.
4.1.25 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid and
ambient conditions to which they are exposed.

4.2 THERMOWELL:
4.2.1 Thermowell shall be installed for all temperature-sensing elements installed on process
lines or vessels.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 5 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

4.2.2 The thermowell shall be suitable for the process media, generally 316 SS, or other material
as required by the project piping specification. The thermowell shall be machined from
drilled bar stock with minimum wall thickness of 4.8mm, and 6mm bore. Bore shall be
concentric with the outside diameter to within 10% of wall thickness. The thermowell shall
be provided with hexagonal head.
4.2.3 (The thermowell material requirement for various piping classes shall be as per Annexure –
I of this specification)
4.2.4 Thermowell flanges shall be of stainless steel and shall be rated one piping class higher
than the pipe to which it is connected.
4.2.5 Thermometer well shall have ½” NPT female thread for element and 1½” flanged for
vessel or piping connection.
4.2.6 Thermowells to be used as test wells shall be provided with a stainless steel screwed plug
and chain.
4.2.7 Wells for insulated vessels and lines shall have extension necks.
4.2.8 The Thermowell tip shall be at centerline of pipe but immersion length shall not exceed
400 mm for higher size pipes.
4.2.9 Thermowell shall be designed to withstand vibration stresses caused by stream velocity.
Wake frequency at maximum flow velocity shall be less than 80% of the natural frequency
of the Thermowell. The Contractor shall provide calculations to ASME performance Test
Code 19.3, Part 3: Instruments and Apparatus temperature Measurement.
4.2.10 Thermowell welding shall be full penetration type with ‘U’ length as follows:
4” to 6” lines - 280 mm
Above 6” - 320 mm
Vessels - 400 mm
4.2.11 The typical thermowell installation shall be as per Annexure – II & III of this specification.

4.3 Accuracy : ±0.1%. Of FSD


4.4 Repeatability: ±0.1%.
4.5 Output Signal:
Output signal shall be 2 wired 4-20 mA DC, and capable of delivering the rated current
signal into external load of around 600 ohms when powered with 24V DC (negative
earthed).
4.6 Material:
4.6.1 The material requirements for TT shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.5 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria, FS-2004A for Piping Design (2008) & Piping Material
Specification

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 6 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

4.6.2 Transmitter body studs shall be high tensile stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant
material for higher stress levels.
4.6.3 In general MOC for TW shall be as per Annexure I. T/W, rating class shall be one
class higher than Piping Class.
4.6.4 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid and
ambient conditions to which they are exposed

4.7 Enclosure Class:


The Transmitter shall be weatherproof (IP 65 or better). In addition the TT enclosure shall
be as per Clause no 3.6.4.4.5 of Instrument Design Criteria

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 7 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Thermowell

S. No. Piping Class Well Flange

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1, PD1, PE1,
1 PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2, XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8 SS316 CS
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE SS316 CS

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS316 SS316

4 A5 MONEL MONEL

5 A7 TITANUM TITANUM

** A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N, PA1N, PB1N,


6 PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS316 SS316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS316L SS316L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11, PD11, PE11,


8 PF11
HASTC HASTC

[** All wetted parts of Thermowell shall conform to NACE MR-01-75 (Latest edition).]

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 8 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

ANNEXURE – II

HOOK UP DRAWING – THERMOWELL

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3302
Offshore Design Section SPECIFICATION FOR Rev. No. 3
Engineering Services TEMPERATURE Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2000 TRANSMITTER Page: 9 OF 10
(ELECTRONIC)

Annexure-III
Temperature Transmitter W/Thermo well

VERTICAL MOUNTING

HORIZONTAL MOUNTING

(1)- FLANGE WITH GASKET (RF /RTJ) AS PER PIPING STANDARD


(2)- STUD BOLTS & NUTS ASTM A320 GR.L7M/A194 GR.7M WITH HOT DIPGALVANIZED TO
ASTM A153, AS PER THE REQUIREMENT

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004A ODS/SOP/008 to 015 03 00 02.12.2008
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3400
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
GAUGE” Page: 2 OF 7

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Standards
3
2.2 Reference documents
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Differential Pressure gauge 3
4.1 General 3
4.2 Material 4
4.3 Range 5
4.4 Accuracy 5
4.5 Reading scales 5
Annexure I Hook-up drawing 6
Annexure II Data Sheet Format 7

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3400
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
GAUGE” Page: 3 OF 7

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Differential Pressure Gauge for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Standards :
a) ASME B 40 .100 – latest edition : Pressure gauges and gauge attachments
b) EN - 837 - latest edition: Pressure gauges Dimensions, metrology, requirements
and testing
2.2 Reference Documents :
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements
indicated in above reference documents.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Differential Pressure
gauge suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing,
testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares,
and assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site.
4.0 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE:
4.1 General:
4.1.1 Differential Pressure gauges shall be used for local indication. Differential
Pressure Gauge may be Field mounted or Panel mounted based on the
requirements.
4.1.2 Dial size of Field mounted gauges shall not be less than 6” (150 mm). Process
connection for these gauges shall be ½ ” NPTM , generally with bottom entry .
4.1.3 Dial size of Panel mounted differential pressure gauges shall be of preferably
6”or 4” . Process connections for these gauges shall be ½ ” NPTM with back
entry .
4.1.4 Differential Pressure gauges shall in general be heavy duty, weatherproof , white
coloured dial with black numerals & markings and with black pointer.
4.1.5 Position of blowout disc shall be preferably rear mounted where ever not possible,
top mounted can be considered.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3400
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
GAUGE” Page: 4 OF 7

4.1.6 Gauges that are 150 mm (6”) or larger diameter shall have micrometer pointers
for external or internal zero adjustment. Gauge pointers shall be adjustable
without removal from shaft.
4.1.7 Differential Pressure gauge measuring element shall generally be Bellows /
Diaphragm type. Diaphragm seals shall be used for measurement of slurries,
viscous and chemicals (effluent/ injection services etc.). Diaphragm seals with
capillary shall in general be 1 ½” flanged.
4.1.8 Additionally, where damping is required for gauges, differential pressure gauge
shall be liquid filled or any other proven (with PTR) advanced damping
technology can be used (without liquid filled damping) to arrest the process
fluctuations and vibrations due to installation. Glycerin / Silicone oil shall
generally be used for liquid filling. Liquid filled gauges (considering both
process and ambient temperature limits) shall have a small vapor space for
thermal expansion of liquid fill.
4.1.9 Differential Pressure gauge enclosure shall be weather proof to NEMA 4 / IP 65
or better. Over range protection of 130 % of maximum static pressure shall be
provided without affecting its calibration / accuracy.
4.1.10 Gauges located on lines subjected to pulsating pressures (such as all pumps,
compressors discharge service etc.) shall be provided with Snubber type pulsation
dampeners.
4.1.11 Gauge savers shall be provided wherever specified to prevent the gauge when
maximum working pressure exceeds 130% of maximum static pressure. Gauges
in vacuum service shall have over range protection to full vacuum. A visible Stop
Pin shall be used to restrict the upper limit of the pointer travel.
4.1.12 DPG shall be installed in such way that length of impulse lines is kept minimum.
4.1.13 Gauges shall be capable of passing Vibration Test , Fatigue Test , Endurance
cycle Test etc. as specified in International Standards (EN -837 etc.) .
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 Process connections and ‘Material of construction’ of all wetted parts shall be
compatible with the process fluid however it shall be SS 316 minimum . For Sour
service applications, MOC shall be compliant to NACE MR-01 75 requirements .
For raw seawater service, all wetted parts shall be of Monel material.
4.2.2 Material for Pointer shall be SS 316 or Aluminium.
4.2.3 Material for movement shall be SS 316 however for liquid filled gauges SS 304
can be acceptable.
4.2.4 Valve Manifold shall be SS 316 as minimum and compliant to NACE MR-01 75
wherever required. Superior material can be accepted.
4.2.5 Case material for all Differential Pressure gauges shall be SS 316 with a screwed
bezel / bayonet bezel retaining ring and weatherproof design.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3400
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
GAUGE” Page: 5 OF 7

4.2.6 Window material shall be of Shatter-proof glass or ‘fully transparent’ acrylic


plastic.
4.2.7 Gauge saver and snubber when used shall be of the same material as that of the
pressure element.
4.3 Range :
4.3.1 Range shall be selected such that at zero differential pressure , pointer will be at
starting point of the scale however only for Vacuum applications, Pointer
position will be at the centre of the scale.
4.4 Accuracy :
4.4.1 Accuracy shall be +/- 1 % of the span or better. However for Low Static pressure
applications ( i.e 0 to 1 kg/cm2 ) accuracy can be +/- 1.6 % of FSD or better.
4.4.2 Change in process conditions shall not affect the accuracy of gauge.
4.5 Reading Scales:
4.5.1 Indicating scale shall be direct reading type . It shall have scale as ‘mm H2O’/
‘mm Hg’ / ‘PSI’ as per process requirements.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3400
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
GAUGE” Page: 6 OF 7

ANNEXURE – I
(Hook Up Drawing)

BILL OF MATERIAL

ITEM QTY SIZE DESCRIPTION MATERIAL

17 2 ½” NPTF TEE , THKxTHKxTHK, SS316

73 2 ½” NPTM NIPPLE , 3” LONG , SS316


PL x THK x THK x THK,

96 2 ½” NPTM PLUG , SCRD SS316

107 A/R ½”OD x 0.065 THK TUBING SS316

138 2 ½” THK x ½” OD NPTM MALE CONNECTOR , SS316

143 6 ½” THK x ½” OD NPTM MALE CONNECTOR , SS316

5 VALVE MANIFOLD SS316 / better

200 - - VALVE - BY PIPING

201 - - NIPPLE - BY PIPING

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3400
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 5
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
GAUGE” Page: 7 OF 7

ANNEXURE – II

TYPICAL DATA SHEET – DIFFERENTIAL PRESSRUE GAUGE

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES


UNITS :- Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C Level/length -M
1 Type 15 Diaphragm Seal (wherever required)
2 Mounting a) Type
3 Dial Size/Colour b) Wetted Parts
4 Case Material c) Other Material
5 Bezel Ring d) Process Connection
6. Window Material e) Facing & Finish
7 Enclosure Class f) Capillary Material
8 Pressure Element g) Armour type
9 Element Material h) Armour Material
10 Socket Material i) Capillary Length
11 Accuracy j) Flushing Filling
Conn.
12 Zero Adjustment 16 Over range protection
13 Connection & Location 17 Blow out protection
14 Movement 18 Options
15 Diff Pressure Range & a) Snubber
Scale
b) Siphon
c) Gauge saver
d) Liquid filled casing
e) Vacuum protection
f) Space ring
g) Solid front

TAG RANGE OPER. MAX. OPER. MAX. FLUID


No. PRESSURE SERVICE TEMP SERVICE SERVICE OPTIONS
TEMP. TEMP.

NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3401
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 5b
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “PRESSURE GAUGE ” Page: 2 OF 7

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Standards
3
2.2 Reference documents
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Pressure gauge 3
4.1 General 3
4.2 Material 4
4.3 Range 5
4.4 Accuracy 5
4.5 Reading scales 5
Annexure I Hook-up drawing 6
Annexure II Data Sheet Format 7

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3401
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 5b
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “PRESSURE GAUGE ” Page: 3 OF 7

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Pressure Gauge for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Standards:
a) ASME B 40 .100 – latest edition : Pressure gauges and gauge attachments
b) EN - 837 - latest edition: Pressure gauges Dimensions, metrology,
requirements and testing
2.2 Reference Documents:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements
indicated in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Pressure gauge suitable
for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and
assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site.
4.0 PRESSURE GAUGE:
4.1 General:
4.1.1 The pressure gauges shall be used for local indication. Pressure Gauge may be
Field mounted or Panel mounted based on requirements.
4.1.2 Dial size of field mounted gauges shall not be less than 6” (150 mm). Process
connection for these gauges shall be ½ ” NPTM with bottom entry.
4.1.3 Dial size of Panel Mounted Type Pressure gauges shall be of preferably 6”or 4”.
Process connection for these gauges shall be ½ ” NPTM with back entry .
4.1.4 Instrument air / gas supply gauges for instruments like positioners, smart
instruments etc, used as output gauge may have 2” (50 mm) dials.
4.1.5 Pressure gauges shall in general be heavy duty, weatherproof , with white
coloured dial with black numerals & markings and with black pointer.
4.1.6 Position of blowout disc shall be preferably rear mounted where ever not possible,
top mounted can be considered.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3401
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 5b
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “PRESSURE GAUGE ” Page: 4 OF 7

4.1.7 Gauges that are 6” (150 mm) or larger diameter shall have micrometer pointers
for external or internal zero adjustment .Gauge pointers shall be adjustable
without removal from shaft.
4.1.8 Pressure gauge measuring element shall generally be Bourdon / Bellows /
Diaphragm type. Diaphragm seals shall be used for measurement of slurries,
viscous and chemicals (effluent/ injection services etc.). Diaphragm seals with
capillary shall in general be 1 ½” flanged. For corrosive fluids, in lieu of
diaphragm seal , measuring element of suitable material can be considered for
such services .
4.1.9 Additionally, where damping is required for gauges, pressure gauge shall be
liquid filled or any other proven (with PTR) advanced damping technology can be
used (without liquid filled damping) to arrest the process fluctuations and
vibrations due to installation. Glycerin / Silicone oil shall generally be used for
liquid filling. Liquid filled gauges (considering both process and ambient
temperature limits) shall have a small vapor space for thermal expansion of liquid
fill.
4.1.10 Pressure gauge enclosure shall be weather proof to NEMA 4 / IP 65 or better.
Pressure gauge shall be capable of withstanding 130% of maximum range without
affecting its calibration / accuracy.
4.1.11 Gauges located on lines subjected to pulsating pressures (such as all pumps,
compressors discharge service etc.) shall be provided with Snubber type pulsation
dampeners.
4.1.12 Gauge savers shall be provided wherever specified to prevent the gauge when
maximum working pressure exceeds 130% of range. Gauges in vacuum service
shall have over range protection to full vacuum. A visible Stop Pin shall be used
to restrict the upper limit of the pointer travel.
4.1.13 Gauges shall be capable of passing Vibration Test , Fatigue Test , Endurance
cycle Test etc. as specified in International Standards (EN -837 etc.) .
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 Material requirements for pressure gauges shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.
4.2.2 Process connections and ‘Material of construction’ of all wetted parts shall be
compatible with the process fluid however it shall be SS 316 minimum . For Sour
gas applications , MOC shall be compliant to NACE MR-01 75 requirements.
However for raw seawater service, material for all wetted parts shall be Monel.
4.2.3 Material for Pointer shall be SS 316 or Aluminium. Movement material for liquid
filled gauges can be SS 316 or SS 304. For gauges with other proven technology
(without liquid filled damping) , movement material shall be SS 316.
4.2.4 Case material for all pressure gauges shall be SS 316 with a screwed bezel /
bayonet bezel retaining ring and weatherproof design.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3401
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 5b
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “PRESSURE GAUGE ” Page: 5 OF 7

4.2.5 Window material shall be of Shatter-proof glass or ‘fully transparent’ acrylic


plastic.
4.2.6 Gauge saver and snubber when used shall be of the same material as that of the
pressure element.
4.3 Range:
4.3.1 Range shall be selected such that the normal operating pressure lies
approximately in the middle third of full scale.
4.4 Accuracy:
4.4.1 Accuracy shall be +/- 1 % of the span or better.
4.4.2 Change in process conditions shall not affect the accuracy of gauge.
4.5 Reading Scales:
4.5.1 Indicating scale shall be direct reading type . Reading Scale used for 2 ” dial size
gauges shall be ‘PSI ’ and for other dial size gauges, it shall be Kg/cm2g unless
otherwise specified in bid documents .

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3401
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 5b
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “PRESSURE GAUGE ” Page: 6 OF 7

ANNEXURE – I
(Hook Up Drawing)

Note : For Sour Gas service drain valve shall be ball valve and drain connection shall be
connected to closed drain .

BILL OF MATERIAL

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION SIZE


NO

1 1 SWAGE NIPPLE , PL x TH ¾ ” X ½ ” NPTM

2 2 NEEDLE VALVE , SCRWD ½ ” NPT

3 1 PIPE NIPPLE ½ ” NPTM

4 1 3-WAY ,2-VALVE MANIFOLD

5 1 CAP ½” NPTF

6&7 2 MALE CONNECTOR ½” NPT

TUBINGS ½” NPTM

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3401
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 5b
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 “PRESSURE GAUGE ” Page: 7 OF 7

ANNEXURE – II
TYPICAL DATA SHEET – PRESSRUE GAUGE

PRESSURE GAUGES
UNITS :- Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C Level/length -M
1 Type 15 Diaphragm Seal (wherever required)
2 Mounting a) Type
3 Dial Size/Colour b) Wetted Parts
4 Case Material c) Other Material
5 Bezel Ring d) Process Connection
6. Window Material e) Facing & Finish
7 Enclosure Class f) Capillary Material
8 Pressure Element g) Armour type
9 Element Material h) Armour Material
10 Socket Material i) Capillary Length
11 Accuracy j) Flushing Filling
Conn.
12 Zero Adjustment 16 Over range protection
13 Connection & Location 17 Blow out protection
14 Movement 18 Options
a) Snubber
b) Siphon
c) Gauge saver
d) Liquid filled casing
e) Vacuum protection
f) Space ring
g) Solid front

TAG RANGE OPER. MAX. OPER. MAX. FLUID


No. PRESSURE SERVICE TEMP SERVICE SERVICE OPTIONS
TEMP. TEMP.

NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 1 of 8

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

PRESSURE SWITCH

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED REV.
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE
REVISED BY BY No.
PAGES
VS SRS GRP 8 18.02.2008 2
AK SRS AC 9 28.03.2007 1
AK MC AC 9 25.08.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 2 of 8

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Codes and Standards 3
2.1 Reference specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Pressure Switch (Electrical) 3
4.1 Switch type 3
4.2 Material 4
4.3 Accuracy 4
4.4 Reading scales 4
4.5 Enclosure class 4
Annexure I Material Selection 5
Annexure II Hook-up drawing 6
Annexure III Data Sheet Format 8

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 3 of 8

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of pressure switch (electrical) for the intended service.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Documents and Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Process Design Criteria / Instrument Process Data Sheets / Instrument List with
Process Parameters
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated
in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the pressure switch (electrical)
suitable for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and assistance
where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in
conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
4.0 PRESSURE SWITCH (ELECTRICAL):
4.1 Switch Type:
4.1.1 Electrical type.
4.1.2 General:
4.1.2.1 The switch mechanism shall be a hermetically sealed micro-switch of SPDT,
snap action type.
4.1.2.2 The switch shall be provided with 2Nos. ½”NPT (F) cable entries. One cable
entry shall be plugged with suitable explosion-proof plug.
4.1.2.3 Arcing during making or breaking of switch contacts shall be minimum. The
switch contacts shall have long life and minimum wear. The material chosen for
switch contact shall have good thermal conductivity for dissipating heat.
4.1.2.4 There shall be minimum bounce during making and breaking of switch contacts
and switch mechanism shall be designed to minimize the vibration.
4.1.2.5 Process connection from bottom side, 316SS threaded ½” NPTF.
4.1.2.6 The switch element shall be selected in such a way that it can withstand an over-
range pressure of 1.5 times maximum range without loss of calibration.
4.1.2.7 Pressure switches shall be heavy duty, with user adjustable set point.
Adjustments shall be tamper-proof.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 4 of 8

4.1.2.8 The pressure-sensing element shall be designed to meet a service life of one
million switching cycles.
4.1.2.9 Vendor shall ensure that set point falls between 35% and 70% of adjustable
range of the selected model in general.
4.1.2.10 Pressure switch shall have tamper-proof set point adjustment.
4.1.2.11 All pressure instrument shall be mounted as close as possible to sensing point.
4.1.2.12 Mountings accessories required for Pressure Instrument shall be 316SS or better.
When switches and other devices are grouped and mounted on a instrument stand
it should be in such a manner that removal of each instrument shall be possible
without the need to disconnect, dismantle or remove any other instruments or
tubing.
4.1.2.13 All the switches shall be Ex d .
4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for Pressure switch shall in general be according to
clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and the material selection chart
provided in Annexure I of this specification.
4.2.2 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid
and ambient conditions to which they are exposed.
4.3 Accuracy:
The maximum error shall not exceed 1% of the span. Repeatability shall be ±1%.
4.4 Reading Scales: Units for pressure switch shall be in kg/cm2.
4.5 Enclosure Class:
In addition to weatherproof, the switch enclosure shall be explosion-proof to
NEMA-7 and certified by third party agencies like UL/FM/BASEEFA or equal for
use in hazardous area (CL 1,DIV.1, GR.D).

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 5 of 8

ANNEXURE – I

Material Selection Chart for Pressure switch

S. No. Piping Class ELEMENT/SOCKET

A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, XF1, F1, PA1, PB1,


PD1, PE1, PXF1, PF1, A2, B2, D2, E2,
1 XG1, A1H, A3, B3, A8 SS316
(EXCEPT WAT. INJ. SERVICE)

2 INJECTION WATER SERVICE MONEL

3 A4, A6, A9, B9, D9, E9 SS316

4 A5 MONEL

5 A7

A1N, B1N, D1N, E1N, F1N, XF1N, PA1N,


6 PB1N, PD1N, PF1N, XG1N
SS316

7 A10, B10, D10, E10, F10 SS316L

A11, B11, D11, E11, F11, PA11, PB11,


8 PD11, PE11, PF11
MONEL 400

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 6 of 8

ANNEXURE – II
(Hook Up Drawing)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 7 of 8

ANNEXURE –II CONT..

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3402
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 2
11 - High, Mumbai PRESSURE SWITCH Discipline Instt.
ISO 9001: 2000 ELECTRICAL Page # 8 of 8

ANNEXURE – III :- TYPICAL DATA SHEET

PRESSURE SWITCHES (ELECTRICAL)

UNITS: - Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C
Level/length -M
1 Type Pneumatic MEASURING UNIT
2 Function Indicate Pressure 26
Service
3 Mounting 27
Element Type
4 Case, Window 28
Element Material
5 Electrical Area Class - 29
Socket Material
6 Enclosure Class 30
Body Material
7 Intrinsically Safe 31
Connection location
8 Air Supply 32
DIAPHRAGM SEAL (Wherever
Required)
9 Power Supply Type
10 Cable entry Wetted Parts
11 Accuracy Other Material
12 Repeatability Process Connection
SWITCH Facing & Finish
13 Electric Capillary Material
14 Quantity Armour Material
15 Form Capillary Length
16 Type Flushing Filling conne.
17 Rating MISCELLANIOUS
18 Load Type 33 Over range protection
19 Cable Entry 34 Blow out protection -
20 No. Of Entries 35 Options
21 Pneumatic A Mounting accessories
22 Type B Air filter regulator with Gauge
C Intrinsically safe weather proof out put
meter
D Pressure gauges for supply, input and
output
E Snubber
F Gauge saver
G Air filter regulator
23 Signal H Vaccum protection
24 Set point adjustment 36 Pneumatic Connect.
25 Differential Load driving capability
TAG RANGE SET SET PRESSURE TEMP. FLUID SERVI OPTI
CE
No. POINT POINT OVER MAX OPER MAX ONS
1 2

NOTE:-

VENDOR SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3403
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 2 OF 6

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.

1.0 Scope of This Document 3

2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications 3

3.0 Scope of Supply 3

4.0 SMART Type Pressure transmitter 3

4.1 General 3

4.2 Material 4

4.3 Accuracy 4

4.4 Output Signal 4

4.5 Repeatability 4

4.6 Enclosure class 4

Annexure I Hook-up drawing 5

Annexure II Data Sheet Format 6

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3403
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 3 OF 6

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the selection of
Pressure transmitter (electronic) for the intended service.
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
a) Instrumentation /Process Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Instrument / Process Data Sheets
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements indicated in the
Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
3.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Pressure Transmitter suitable for
measurement range, accuracy, MoC & standard accessories for its intended application.
3.3 The procurement, tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along
with accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation & commissioning
at site shall be come under vendor’s responsibility.

4.0 SMART TYPE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER:


4.1 General:
4.1.1 Transmitters shall be immune to Radio frequency interference due to walkie-talkie, paging
system, communication system etc. All electronic modules shall be designed for short circuit
protection.
4.1.2 Span shall be continuously adjustable over the transmitter range. The PT shall be provided
with ½”NPT (F) cable entries.
4.1.3 All transmitters shall be provided with Digital integral output meters(with engineering units).
The output meter shall be suitable for use in the hazardous area.
4.1.4 PT shall have easily approachable zero and span adjustment facility.
4.1.5 Process connection of the transmitter shall be from the bottom side, 316SS threaded ½”
NPTF.
4.1.6 Over range protection shall be 130% of range or maximum pressure whichever is higher.
4.1.7 Transmitter shall be furnished with all necessary weather and anti-corrosion protection to
prevent damage from saline and corrosive process atmosphere.
4.1.8 All pressure instruments shall be mounted as close as possible to sensing point.
4.1.9 Transmitter shall be supplied with a 3 way valve manifold

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3403
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 4 OF 6

4.1.10 The Pressure transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and certified by statutory body like
UL/FM/BASEEFA/CMRI/DGMS or equivalent.
4.1.11 ‘Universal Hand Held Configurator’ shall be supplied for transmitters’ calibration. The
number of calibrator shall be two per process platform & one per well platform.
4.1.12 All vent and drains of the transmitter/tubing/valve manifolds shall be routed to drain header .
If the meter is on sour service and harmful fluids like chemical etc. then it will be routed to
close drain header.

4.2 Material:
4.2.1 The material requirements for PT shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.5 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria, FS-2004A for Piping Design (2008) & Piping Material
Specification.
4.2.2 All wetted parts shall be suitable for intended process application.
4.2.3 Transmitter body studs shall be high tensile stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant
material for higher stress levels.
4.2.4 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid and
ambient conditions to which they are exposed.

4.3 Accuracy:
±0.1% of FSD or better.

4.4 Output Signal:


4.4.1 Output signal shall be 2 wired 4-20 mA DC, and capable of delivering the rated current
signal into external load of around 600 ohms when powered with nominal 24V DC (negative
earthed).
4.4.2 Transmitters shall have HART protocol for communication for remote calibration and
diagnostics from HART maintenance system
4.5 Repeatability:
4.5.1 Flow Transmitters shall have a repeatability of ±0.1%.

4.6 Enclosure Class:


The transmitter shall be weatherproof (IP 65 or better). In addition the PT enclosure shall be
as per Clause no 3.6.4.4.5 of Instrument Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3403
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 5 OF 6

ANNEXURE – I
(Hook Up Drawing)

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3403
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 4A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt.
ISO – 9001:2008 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
(ELECTRONIC) Page: 6 OF 6

ANNEXURE-II :- Typical data sheet for Pressure Transmitter

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (ELECTRONIC)

UNITS :- Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C Level/length -M

1 Type
DIAPHRAGM SEAL (Wherever Required)
2 Function 21 Type
3 Mounting 22 Wetted Parts
4 Case & Material 23 Other Material
5 Electrical Area Class 24 Process Connection

6 Enclosure Class 25 Facing & Finish


7 Intrinsically Safe 26 Capillary Material
8 Power Supply 27 Armour Material
9 Cable entry 28 Capillary Length
10 Accuracy 29 Flushing Filling conne.
11 Repeatability
MISCELLANIOUS

30 Over range protection


TRANSMITTER
12 Out put 31 Blow out protection
13 Power supply 32 Options
a) Mounting accessories 3 WAY
14 MEASURING UNIT VALVE MANIFOLD
15 Service

16 Pressure Element Type

17 Element Material 33 Load driving capability


18 Socket Material
19 Body Material
20 Connection location

TAG RANGE OPERATI PRESSURE TEMP. FLUID


No. NG OVER MAX OPER SERVIC OPTIONS
PRESSUR MAX E
E

Vendor Seal and Sign

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/023 ODS/SOP/017 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3404
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 0
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“CURRENT TO PNEUMATIC
CONVERTER” Page: 2 OF 5

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications 3

2.1 3
Scope of Supply
3.0 General 3
4.0 P to I converter 3
4.1 Converter Type 3
4.2 Material 3
4.3 Accuracy 3
4.4 Reading scales 3
4.5 Enclosure class 3
4.6 Hazardous area certifications 3
Annexure I Data Sheet Format 4

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3404
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 0
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“CURRENT TO PNEUMATIC
CONVERTER” Page: 3 OF 5

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for the
selection of Current to Pressure converter for the intended service.
2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications

a) Instrumentation Design Criteria


b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Instrument Process Data Sheets
e)
2.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
2.2 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements
indicated in the Basic Bid Work, and the P & IDs.
2.3 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the I to P converter suitable
for its intended application, its procurement, tagging, packing, testing &
calibration, preparation for shipment, along with accessories, spares, and
assistance where required for its installation & commissioning at site. This FS
shall be read in conjunction with the Instrument Design Criteria.
3.0 Current to Pressure Converter:
3.1 General
A “current to pressure” converter (I/P) converts an analog signal (4 to 20 mA) to
a proportional linear pneumatic output (3 to 15 psig). Its purpose is to translate the
analog output from a control system into a precise, repeatable pressure value to
control pneumatic actuators/operators, pneumatic valves, dampers, vanes, etc.
3.1.1 The input signal shall be 4-20 mA, 2 wires.
3.1.1.1 The I/P converter shall be provided with two No. ½”NPT cable entries, with one
will be plugged.
3.1.1.2 The output signal shall be 3-15 psi. The output signal shall be linear in relation to
input signal.

3.1.1.3 The change in out put due to 10 degree Celsius change in ambient temperature
(Max-400C, Min-160C) should be very minimum.
3.1.1.4 I/P shall have externally adjustable zero and span.
3.2 Material:
3.2.1 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid
and ambient conditions to which they are exposed.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3404
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 0
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“CURRENT TO PNEUMATIC
CONVERTER” Page: 4 OF 5

3.2.2 Housing material -Die-cast low copper aluminum alloy body and cover, with
an epoxy powder finish.
3.2.3 Mounting accessories: shall be SS316.
3.3 Accuracy: better than ± 0.5% of span.
3.4 Reading Scales: Units for I/P converter shall be in PSI.
3.5 Enclosure Class: The I/P converter shall be weatherproof to NEMA-4X (IP-
65) and shall be intrinsically safe.
3.6 Hazardous area certifications: By third party agencies like
IEC/UL/ATEX/CMRE/FM/BASEEFA/CENELEC/CSA/PTB for use in
hazardous area (Class 1, Division.1, Groups C and D, T3).

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3404
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 0
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
“CURRENT TO PNEUMATIC
CONVERTER” Page: 5 OF 5

ANNEXURE-I -TYPICAL DATA SHEET

CURRENT TO PNEUMATIC CONVERTER.


UNITS :- Flow Liquid – M3/HR Gas – NM3/HR Steam – Kg/hr Pressure – kg/cm2 Temperature – deg C Level/length -mm

1 Type 10 Accuracy

2 Mounting 11 Actuation

3 Ambient Temperature 12 Housing Type

4 Electric Supply 13 Accessories

5 Input 14 Intrinsically safe

6 Out Put 15 Body material

7 Pneumatic connection

8 Area Classification

9 Conduit Connection

Electrical

Pneumatic

NOTE :-

VENDER SEAL AND SIGNATURE

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 2 of 35

CONTENTS
Clause
ITEM Page No.
No.
- Title page 1
- Index of contents 2
1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Reference Documents and Specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 4
4.0 Fire & Gas Detection System 4
4.1 General 4
4.2 System Requirements 6
4.2.1 Detectors and Field Devices 6
4.2.1.1 General 6
4.2.1.2 Gas Detectors 7
4.2.1.3 Fire Detectors 12
4.2.1.4 Manual Alarm Stations 15
4.2.1.5 Other Associated Field Devices 15
4.2.2 Control Devices 17
4.2.2.1 General 17
4.2.2.2 Fire & Gas detection system panel 17
4.3 Functional Requirements 25
4.3.1 Control Philosophy 25
4.4 Spares Philosophy 29
4.5 Material 29
5.0 Equipment Protection 29
6.0 Installation Requirement 30
7.0 Testing and Inspection 30
8.0 Quality Assurance 32
9.0 Documentation 33
10.0 Tagging & Nameplates 34
11.0 Review & Approval 35
12.0 Vendor Pre-Qualification Requirements 35
13.0 Preparation for Shipment 35
14.0 Receipt & Storage 35

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 3 of 35

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT

1.1 This specification defines the minimum requirements for the design,
engineering, fabrication, inspection-testing, supply, installation and
commissioning of Fire & Gas Detection System for use on offshore platform.

1.2 This specification describes Fire & Gas Detection System with field detectors
and the functionality of the system as a whole. It does not cover the detailed
specifications of:

a) PLC: Functional Specifications of PLC are addressed in spec. no. MR /


OD / INST / FS / C101
b) Pneumatic Panel. Functional Specifications of Pneumatic Panel are
addressed in spec. no. MR / OD / INST / FS / 3501.

1.3 Any deviations from the requirements of this specification shall be stated in
‘Deviation List’ in contractor’s proposal. Unless specific deviations are stated,
it shall be understood that the Fire & Gas Detection system is in accordance
with the specification.

1.4 Contractor’s proposal shall also include revision status sheets, which shall
show revision status of each page of the proposal / purchase specification for
every submission.

1.5 Any ambiguity in this specification and the reference specifications pertaining
to the requirements of Fire & Gas Detection System shall be referred to the
company for clarification prior to finalization of Purchase Specification.

2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS

a) Basic Bid Work


b) Instrumentation Design Criteria
c) Spec. No. MR / OD / INST / FS / C101: Functional specification for
PLC.
d) Spec. No. MR / OD / INST / FS / 3501: Functional specification for
Shutdown Panel.
e) HSE -5102, OISD-189

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 4 of 35

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

3.1 The Fire and Gas Detection System shall include the following equipment:
a) Field Detectors including thermal, smoke, point and open path type
Hydrocarbon gas detectors, Hydrogen gas detectors, toxic gas (H2S)
detectors, Triple IR (outdoor and GG-PT Enclosure) and UV/IR (indoor)
flame detectors, Fire loop system with Fusible plugs, ESD & FSD pull
stations (valves), manual alarm stations, flashing and audible alarm
beacons etc.
b) Accessories including mounting units, etc to make the system
operationally and functionally complete.
c) Interfaces to the field as well as Control Room for Alarm & initiation of
Fire Suppression actuating devices including Fire Water Pump control
panel, opening of Blow down valve for reducing hydro-carbon
inventory, deluge valves and for release of DCP/Clean Agent & other
Fire extinguishing agent.
d) Interfaces to other systems of the platform including DCS, ESD system,
Package equipment (such as Gas Turbines, Process gas compressors)
fire & gas detection system, Paging system, emergency generator,
pneumatic panel.
e) Fire and Gas Matrix panel, Critical alarms annunciation.
f) Other items including portable purge calibrators, calibration cylinders,
commissioning spares, special tools & tackles.

4.0 FIRE & GAS DETECTION SYTEM

4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 The Fire & Gas Detection system is required to address the risk associated
with imminent or established fire and combustible/ toxic gas release.

4.1.2 Type approval by FM/UL/BASEEFA/CENELEC/CSA/IEC/DGMS/PTB/


CMRI/ATEX for use in Class I, Division I, Group C & D and T3 hazardous
area, of all Fire and Gas detectors shall be required.

4.1.3 Unless otherwise specified all contacts shall be volt free contacts which shall
be 2 X SPDT or DPDT type, rated 24 VDC – 2 amps.

4.1.4 The Fire & Gas Detection system scheme shall be one out of the following
two schemes (refer ‘Basic Bid Work’ for type of scheme to be followed for
the project)-
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 5 of 35

a) Scheme – A : For Well-Head Platform


b) Scheme – B : For Process Platform

4.1.5 Scheme - A : Fire & Gas Detection system for Well-Head Platform shall
constitute the following :
a) Field detectors including point and open-path type hydrocarbon gas
detectors, Hydrogen gas detectors, H2S gas detectors, Smoke detectors,
Triple IR Flame detectors, Thermal detectors, Pneumatic Fire loops with
Fusible plugs, FSD & ESD pull stations (valves), Flashing & Audible
Alarm Beacons and Clean Agent System for Fire Suppression.
b) Each loop shall generate at least two independently adjustable volt free
contact outputs.
c) Accessories including mounting units, etc to make the system
operationally and functionally complete.
d) Detectors controller / monitor card mounting unit with relays logics or
F&G PLC (SIL 3) (as per basic bid work) which shall be installed in
SAFE area.
e) Interface to the Electrical Rooms actuating devices as well as field
including ESD/FSD, deluge valve actuation logic, Clean Agent system,
Fire Water Pump etc.
f) Interfaces to other systems of the platform including pneumatic
shutdown Panel / PLC based SDP/ General Purpose Standalone PLC,
RTU etc..
g) Other items including portable purge calibrators, calibration cylinders,
commissioning spares, special tools & tackles.
4.1.6 Scheme – B : Fire & Gas Detection system for Process Platform shall
constitute the following :
a) Field devices including thermal, smoke, point and open-path type
Hydrocarbon gas detectors, Hydrogen gas detectors, toxic gas (H2S)
detectors, Triple-IR (outdoor & GG-PT enclosure) and UV/IR (indoor)
flame detectors, Pneumatic Fire loops with Fusible plugs, FSD & ESD
pull stations (valves), manual alarm stations, flashing and audible alarm
beacons for actuation of Fire suppression system.
b) Accessories including mounting units, etc to make the system
operationally and functionally complete.
c) Interfaces to the field as well as Control Room actuating devices
including actuation of Clean Agent system, deluge valves & FWP
Control Panels, pneumatic solenoid & pilot valves, extinguishant
release, Blow-down valve open etc.
d) Interfaces to other systems of the platform including DCS, ESD system,
RTU, Package equipment (such as Gas Turbines, Process gas
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 6 of 35

compressors) Fire & Gas detection system, Paging system, Emergency


Generator, Pneumatic Shutdown panels.
e) Fire and Gas Matrix panel, Critical alarms annunciations.
f) Other items including portable purge calibrators, calibration cylinders,
commissioning spares, special tools & tackles.
For Building Modules, in the Enclosed areas like, Living Quarters, Control
Rooms, Switch Gear Rooms etc. all the F&G detectors shall be addressable
type and connected directly to the Addressable type F&G system which shall
be connected to a SIL 3 F&G PLC for execution of voting logic and actuation
of extinguishing agent. For open areas, all the F&G detectors shall be
addressable type and shall be either directly connected to SIL 3 F&G PLC
system or through Addressable interface unit. Fire Alarm Aspiration System
shall be provided for Control Rooms and Switch Gear Rooms and shall be
connected to SIL 3 F&G PLC (for SIL 3 PLC Refer Specification MR / OD /
INST / FS / C101).
4.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The F&G system will be powered from a dedicated dual 24 VDC battery
back-up supply, which will provide stable supply, allowing orderly shutdown
and monitoring if power is lost. Power supply sizing shall also consider
requirement of installed spares & spare space in F&G system ‘Control
Devices’. The back-up system capacity shall allow continued monitoring by
the F&G system for a nominal period of minimum 24 hours for Process
Platform and 7 days for Well-Head Platform powered by Solar/Wind and 48
hours for Well-Head Platforms powered from Process Platform through Sub-
sea Cable. This period shall be confirmed by the contractor following project
risk assessments and HAZOP. A common power supply fault alarm shall be
provided for connection to RTU (for Scheme - A) / DCS (for Scheme - B).
Contacts shall be volt free contacts. The complete System shall be G3/GX
compliance with conformal protective coating as a minimum (ref. IDC rev6
Cl. No. 3.6.4.1.2.3). The F&G system shall have floating Ground power
supply. The F&G System shall be compatible to accommodate addressable
type detectors. The system shall have line monitoring system for all the
actuation loops.

4.2.1 DETECTORS AND FIELD DEVICES


4.2.1.1 GENERAL
4.2.1.1.1 The detectors and field devices shall be suitable for the offshore climate
including regular monsoonal rains and corrosive marine environment.
4.2.1.1.2 The atmospheric conditions that detectors and field devices will be subject to
are in general as per Instrumentation Design Criteria Cl. No. 3.6.4.4.1.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 7 of 35

4.2.1.1.3 Detector Location: The Contractor shall specify each type of detector and
their locations and mountings, to ensure the earliest response to imminent or
established fire or hydrocarbon release or toxic (H2S) gas release and
accumulation, with consideration to the following as a minimum:
a) Requirements of referenced standards, particularly API RP 14C, 14G,
ISA 12, ISA 92, NFPA 72 and SGDA (Smoke and Gas Dispersion
Analysis).
b) Equipment layouts: Placement of detectors shall not interfere with
process equipment maintenance.
c) Ease of Maintenance: The fire and gas detectors shall be installed in a
location accessible for calibration and maintenance, preferably from
deck or fixed platform, but not in frequently used access ways.
d) Certain areas shall be avoided, such as sample stations where spurious
alarms would negate the effectiveness of the detection system.
e) All the detectors shall be addressable type (in addition to having the
conventional outputs) for the Process platform.

4.2.1.2 GAS DETECTORS


4.2.1.2.1 For the purpose of selecting gas detectors following general factors shall be
considered-
a) Combustible Gas (HC & H2) Detectors shall be able to perform to the
temperature, humidity, air velocity and vibration specification
prescribed in ISA S 12.13.01 (Part I). Toxic Gas (H2S) Detectors shall
be able to perform to the specifications prescribed in ISA S 12.15.01
(Part I).
b) Temperature Effects: The detectors shall be calibrated at their mean
operating temperature. All components, including the sensor, shall be
designed for operation within the ambient temperature range for the
location of the installation. Where high temperatures are unavoidable,
high-temperature rated detectors with remote sensing heads shall be
employed.
c) Effects of Humidity: The detector housing shall be suitable for offshore
salt laden marine environment.
d) Air Velocity: Sensors shall be located away from prevailing winds,
heating and cooling system. Air circulation patterns and effects of other
equipment that affect circulation shall be taken into consideration while
finalizing the location of the detectors. Where widely varying wind
direction changes are expected, multiple detectors shall be installed to
provide the required coverage.
e) Vibration: Sensors shall be located away from vibration prone areas. If
this is not possible, the sensors shall be mounted on flexible mounts or

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 8 of 35

flexible conduit.
f) Combustible and toxic gas sensors shall be located in accordance with
the protection area limitations of the detector manufacturer.
g) Sensors shall be typically located approximately 1 m from the expected
emission point, and preferably in the direction of ignition sources and /
or populated areas.
h) Special consideration shall be given to the properties of the process gas
(refer Process Design Criteria for properties of process fluids),
specifically its vapour density and predominant component. For lighter-
than-air gases, the detectors shall be placed above the release point. For
heavier-than-air gases, the detectors shall be placed 300-450 mm above
the floor.
i) Detector locations shall take into account the possible flow pattern of the
leaking gas or vapour and ventilation system airflow.
j) The number of detectors shall be based on the number of potential
release sources.
k) Perimeter detection of releases shall be considered in areas containing
large amounts of light hydrocarbons (e.g. process areas or pressure
storage areas) to alert operations to initiate a manual response or to
actuate an automatic response (e.g. unit shutdown or firewater spray
system). These detectors shall be installed along a unit boundary
adjacent to an ignition source.
l) Indoor or partially enclosed installations that may require gas detection
(such as turbine enclosures, compressor stations, etc.) shall be protected
with open path or point detection system.
m) Where buildings are equipped with HVAC, pressurizing or a ventilation
system, a combustible-gas and / or toxic-gas detector shall be located in
the inlet to the system and also in air locks.
n) In high-temperature enclosures, such as enclosures for gas turbines, a
remote sampling head shall be used, with a standard detector located
outside the enclosure and the gas sample aspirated to the detector head.
o) Detectors shall be provided to detect presence of gas into engine air
intakes, and presence of gas in enclosure exhaust vents.
p) Sampling in indoor locations shall be accomplished by diffusion and
convection air currents.
q) No pump or other means of forced air movement shall be required for
normal application.

4.2.1.2.2 Fixed HC Detectors


4.2.1.2.2.1 Fixed Hydrocarbon (HC) Gas Detectors shall be based on Infrared Absorption
Technology. Catalytic HC detectors shall not be used.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 9 of 35

4.2.1.2.2.2 The detecting unit included in the sensor head shall provide adequate
sensitivity and stability, under all conditions, with ±5% accuracy (For Range
of 100 LEL).

4.2.1.2.2.3 The fixed HC gas detectors shall be powered from 24 V DC supply, with a 4-
20 mA signal loop to cover the calibrated range. Detector faults shall be
signaled by 4 mA signal.
Note: In Scheme-A, detector shall provide 2 nos. of volt free contact outputs
for Non-PLC Panel. These 2 nos. of contact outputs shall be independently
adjustable over entire range of gas detection.

4.2.1.2.2.4 Junction Boxes: Explosion proof junction boxes shall be provided with the
detectors for cable termination.

4.2.1.2.2.5 Detector system shall initiate responses at two different concentrations: for
warning alarms and for initiation of executive action. Typical values of these
set-points are:
• 20% and 60% LEL for general process areas
• 15% and 40% LEL for HVAC air intakes
• 5% and 10% LEL for turbine engine air intakes
4.2.1.2.2.6 The alarm condition shall not be resettable until the specific detector reading
has dropped below the warning alarm level as applicable (Manual-resettable
type).

4.2.1.2.2.7 Operator response shall be required to clear the audible and visual alarms.

4.2.1.2.2.8 HC detectors may be either Point Detectors, or Open Path Detectors or a


combination of both.

4.2.1.2.2.9 Point HC Detectors: Point HC Detectors shall be calibrated 0-100% LEL


(Lower Explosive Limit) of Methane in air. A single point detector may be
used for more than one release point, with due consideration to the
manufacturer’s specification of the sensing area.

4.2.1.2.2.10 Open Path HC Detectors: Open Path IR detectors shall be located where the
beam will provide a clear view over process equipment. The detectors shall
be selected for the correct path length with a separate transmitter and receiver.
The installation of transmitter and receiver shall be as per International Codes
and Standards. Combined transmitter and receiver with mirrors shall not be
used. Units shall not be affected by direct sunlight, fog or mist.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 10 of 35

4.2.1.2.2.11 Combination of Open Path and Point IR Detectors: If multiple release


sources are present in a process unit, then both point and line-of-sight
detection may be used.

4.2.1.2.3 Portable HC Gas Detectors


4.2.1.2.3.1 The number of Portable HC Gas Detectors required per platform shall be as
per the Basic Bid Work.

4.2.1.2.3.2 The portable HC detectors shall be capable of detecting 0 – 100% LEL of HC


and shall have an accuracy of ±5% (For Range of 100 LEL).

4.2.1.2.3.3 The portable HC gas detector shall have an integral audio-visual alarm and
shall be factory calibrated for 20% and 60% LEL HC. Alarm shall be
adjustable over the entire detection range of gas detectors.

4.2.1.2.3.4 The portable HC detectors shall be standard size battery (AA/R6 or C/R14 or
D/R20) operated. The batteries shall not be rechargeable type.

4.2.1.2.3.5 The portable HC detector shall be capable of generating a “Battery Low”


Alarm.

4.2.1.2.3.6 The portable HC detectors shall also include accessories such as carrying
case, aspirator, calibration adaptor, etc.

4.2.1.2.3.7 The portable HC detector shall be suitable for Class I, Div I, Group B, C, D,
T3 hazardous area.

4.2.1.2.4 Fixed H2S Detectors


4.2.1.2.4.1 Fixed H2S Detectors shall be based on Electrochemical cell technology.

4.2.1.2.4.2 The fixed H2S gas detectors shall be powered from 24 V DC supply, with a 4-
20 mA signal loop to cover the calibrated range. Detector faults shall be
signaled by 4 mA signal.
Note: In Scheme-A, detector shall provide 2 nos. of volt free contact outputs
for Non-PLC Panel. These 2 nos. of contact outputs shall be independently
adjustable to over entire range of H2S gas detection.

4.2.1.2.4.3 The H2S detectors shall be capable of detecting 0 – 50 ppm of H2S and shall
have an accuracy of ±3 ppm.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 11 of 35

4.2.1.2.4.4 The fixed H2S detectors shall initiate responses at two different
concentrations: for warning alarms and for initiation of executive action.

4.2.1.2.4.5 Nominal system alarm settings shall be 10 ppm for “Alert” Level and 20 ppm
for “Danger” Level.

4.2.1.2.4.6 The alarm condition shall not be resettable until the specific detector reading
has dropped below the warning alarm level as applicable (Manual-resettable
type).

4.2.1.2.4.7 Two H2S detectors shall be installed at each ventilation air intake of control
rooms and normally manned buildings. For Living Quarters H2S detectors
shall have 0 to 10 ppm range with accuracy ±2 ppm. Nominal system alarm
settings shall be 3 ppm for “Alert” Level and 5 ppm for “Danger” Level.

4.2.1.2.4.8 Local display on the sensors and visual alarm indication shall be there.

4.2.1.2.5 Portable H2S Detectors

4.2.1.2.5.1 The number of Portable H2S Gas Detectors required per platform shall be as
per the Basic Bid Work.

4.2.1.2.5.2 The portable H2S detectors shall be capable of detecting 0 – 20ppm of H2S
and shall have an accuracy of ±3 ppm.

4.2.1.2.5.3 The portable H2S gas detector shall have an integral audio-visual alarm for
activation upon detection of 5 ppm and 10 ppm of H2S.

4.2.1.2.5.4 The portable HC detectors shall be standard size battery (AA/R6 or C/R14 or
D/R20) operated. The batteries shall not be rechargeable type.

4.2.1.2.5.5 The portable H2S gas detector shall be capable of generating a “Battery Low”
Alarm.

4.2.1.2.5.6 The portable H2S gas detectors shall also include accessories such as carrying
case, aspirator, calibration adaptor, etc.

4.2.1.2.5.7 The portable H2S detector shall be suitable for Class I, Div I, Group B, C, D,
T3 hazardous area.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 12 of 35

4.2.1.2.6 Fixed H2 Detectors

4.2.1.2.6.1 Fixed catalytic H2 Detectors shall be provided in the battery room and process
areas, which may see release of H2 gas. Minimum of two H2 detectors shall
be provided in an area.

4.2.1.2.6.2 The fixed H2 gas detectors shall be powered from 24 V DC supply, with a 4-
20 mA signal loop to cover the calibrated range. Detector faults shall be
signaled by 4 mA signal.
Typical set-points values for warning alarms and for initiation of executive
action are 20% and 60% LEL respectively.

Note: In Scheme-A, detector shall provide 2 nos. of volt free contacts /


outputs for non-PLC Panel. These 2 nos. of contact shall be independently
adjustable to over entire range of gas detectors.

4.2.1.2.6.3 The H2 detectors shall be capable of detecting 0 – 100% LEL of H2 and shall
have an accuracy of ±5% over the entire detection range.
4.2.1.2.6.4 The catalytic H2 detectors shall not be located in oxygen enriched or depleted
atmospheres.

4.2.1.3 FIRE DETECTORS

4.2.1.3.1 General
4.2.1.3.1.1 The fire detection system shall comprise a variety of fire detection devices
and sensors, including:
• Optical Flame Detectors
• Smoke Detectors
• Thermal Detectors
• Fusible Plug Loops
• Manual Alarm Stations

4.2.1.3.2 Optical Flame Detectors

4.2.1.3.2.1 Optical flame detectors shall be the Triple-IR type and shall make use of such
sensor, filters, and / or design to reject phenomena such as electric arcs,
heaters, artificial light sources, lightning and shall be completely “solar
blind”.

4.2.1.3.2.2 The detectors shall be able to detect all types of flaming fires.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 13 of 35

4.2.1.3.2.3 Detectors shall be powered from 24 V DC, with a 4-20 mA signal loop to
cover the calibrated range. Detector faults shall be signaled by a 4 mA signal.
Sufficient margin shall be allowed between fault, normal and alarm levels to
minimize spurious alarms.

4.2.1.3.2.4 Optical flame detectors shall have automatic, self-diagnostic circuitry that
continuously monitors the optical surfaces, sensor sensitivity and electronic
circuitry, and shall give fault status. Any detector malfunction shall be
alarmed on the Fire and Gas detection system panel and DCS.

4.2.1.3.3 Smoke Detectors

4.2.1.3.3.1 Smoke detectors shall be installed indoors in all rooms, including space above
false ceiling and below false flooring.

4.2.1.3.3.2 The smoke detectors shall incorporate an integral LED indicator for
confirmation that the unit is active.

4.2.1.3.3.3 Detectors those are not visible, such as above false ceiling or under false
flooring, shall be provided with remote LED’s located in the room being
monitored.

4.2.1.3.3.4 Two independent smoke detector loops in cross – zone concept shall be
installed in each area where executive action is required on detection of
smoke.

4.2.1.3.3.5 Photoelectric type smoke detectors shall be used to provide early response to
smoldering or flaming fires in their incipient stages. A detector base shall be
provided for connecting the individual detectors to the Fire and Gas (F&G)
control system.

4.2.1.3.3.6 Smoke detectors shall remain in alarm state until reset by the fire and gas
control system.

4.2.1.3.4 Thermal Detectors (Rate of rise & Fixed Heat Detectors)


4.2.1.3.4.1 Thermal detectors shall be used in all indoor spaces including all rooms and
equipment enclosures, including concealed floor and ceilings voids.

4.2.1.3.4.2 Rate of rise thermal detectors shall be used where an early warning of
smoldering fires is required, such as storerooms and equipment rooms where
air flow or high humidity may inhibit the response of smoke detectors.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 14 of 35

4.2.1.3.4.3 Fixed temperature or rate compensated type heat detectors shall be used
within areas unsuitable for smoke detection where a rapidly achieved high
temperature can be expected, such as machinery rooms or equipment
enclosures. These shall be set at approximately 12oC above maximum
ambient temperature within the area.

4.2.1.3.4.4 Thermal detectors shall remain in alarm state until reset by the fire and gas
control system.

4.2.1.3.4.5 All visible detectors shall incorporate an LED indicator as an integral part of
the detector head or its mounting base. Concealed thermal detectors shall be
provided with an LED “repeater” that is located in a visible location.
Normally, unmanned equipment rooms or offices shall have indicators in the
corridor. The detector circuitry shall cause the LED to remain illuminated
while the detector is the alarm condition.

4.2.1.3.5 Fusible Plug Loops, FSD (Fire Shutdown) valves & ESD (Emergency
Shutdown) valves.

4.2.1.3.5.1 Pneumatic Fire loop having Fusible plug shall be provided to initiate alarm in
F&G System and initiate opening of deluge valve and FSD system. The Fire
loop shall be laid out and segregated according to the fire zones.

4.2.1.3.5.2 Fusible plugs shall be selected to melt at 85oC. Each area covered shall have
independent loop.

4.2.1.3.5.3 Pneumatic Fire loops having fusible plug shall also be provided with
manually operated FSD valves installed at strategic locations all over the
platform as per API-RP-14C. FSD valves shall be RED in color. PSL shall be
provided to pick up the signal from each loop and communicate to F&G PLC
for further necessary action as per Cause and Effect diagram.

4.2.1.3.5.4 Each Fire loops having fusible plug and FSD valve loops shall be originated
from a field mounted Pneumatic Master Shutdown panel / Pneumatic
Charging Panel. Functional specifications of pneumatic panel are addressed in
Spec. no.- MR / OD / INST / FS / 3501.

4.2.1.3.5.5 Fusible plug / FSD valve loops shall be divided into independent group for
each deck corresponding to each fire water deluge networks. These sub-
groups of Fusible plug loops shall be provided with independent loop
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 15 of 35

charging facility.

4.2.1.3.5.6 Manually operated ESD valves shall be provided on the pneumatic loop
generated from Pneumatic Shutdown Panel (Refer Spec. no.- MR / OD /
INST / FS / 3501). ESD valves shall be installed at strategic locations all over
the platform adjacent to each FSD valves. ESD valves shall be BLACK in
color.

4.2.1.4 MANUAL ALARM STATIONS


4.2.1.4.1 Manual alarm stations shall be provided for following functions:
a) Fire alarm.
b) Platform Abandonment.

4.2.1.4.2 Manual alarm stations for Fire alarm shall be located throughout all areas of
the platform, especially at exits and in the main equipment rooms. These
stations shall be located at easily accessible, well lighted, conspicuous areas
and located no more than 30 meters apart.

4.2.1.4.3 Manual alarm stations for Platform Abandonment shall be located in Control
Room and adjacent to each survival craft (exit Point).

4.2.1.4.4 All manual alarm stations shall require a double action to activate the alarm.
They shall be the break-glass, pushbutton type.

4.2.1.4.5 Each unit shall be surface mounted at a height of 1.4 meters and shall be
provided with a striker connected to the station by a chain.

4.2.1.4.6 Each unit shall be wired to the F&G control system in the Control Room.

4.2.1.4.7 The manual alarm stations- Fire alarm shall be red in colour & manual alarm
stations- Platform abandonment shall be black in colour.

4.2.1.4.8 Addressable type Manual Alarm Stations shall be provided.

4.2.1.5 OTHER ASSOCIATED FIELD DEVICES

4.2.1.5.1 Flashing Alarm Beacons

4.2.1.5.1.1 The Flashing alarm beacons shall be direct ignition, Xenon type. Flashing
alarm beacons shall be powered from 24 V DC, supply.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 16 of 35

4.2.1.5.1.2 The Flashing alarm beacons shall have flashing speed of 60 flashes per
minute.

4.2.1.5.1.3 For Scheme- A, following shall be considered-


a) Separate flashing alarm beacons shall be provided for visual indication
of confirmed HC-H2 gas release & H2S gas release.
b) Flashing alarm beacons shall be located at Helideck and Mezzanine
Deck for visibility to personnel approaching the platform via Helicopter
or sea.

4.2.1.5.1.4 For Scheme – B, following shall be considered-


a) Separate flashing alarm beacons shall be provided for visual indication
of confirmed Fire detection, HC-H2 gas release & H2S gas release.
Flashing alarm beacons shall be located at each deck covering all the
areas of the platform. In addition these beacons shall also be located
inside enclosures (such as Enclosure building of Gas Turbines, etc) with
high noise environment and shall be visible 3600.

4.2.1.5.2 Field Sounder

4.2.1.5.2.1 For Scheme- A :


4.2.1.5.2.1.1 Field sounder shall be electronic type, and shall be powered from a 24 V DC,
supply.

4.2.1.5.2.1.2 Field sounder shall be provided for audible alarm for confirmed HC-H2 / H2S
gas release.

4.2.1.5.2.1.3 Field sounder shall be located near personnel rest room on Main deck of the
platform.

4.2.1.5.2.1.4 Power Isolation switch for the Field Sounder & Flashing Alarm Beacons and
Remote Alarm Acknowledgement facility shall be provided to save Power.

4.2.1.5.2.2 For Scheme - B : Tone Generator


Different types of distinct tone for Fire, Gas, ESD, Abandon Platform and all
clear shall be provided with Fire & Gas System. Interfacing between Paging
system and F&G System shall be provided for alarm tone generation in public
address system during exigencies.

4.2.1.5.3 Portable Calibration Kit

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 17 of 35

4.2.1.5.3.1 Complete calibration kit including Portable purge calibrators/calibration


cylinders with all accessories like pressure regulator, flexible hose, adaptor
cap (to fit on sensing heads) etc., as applicable shall be supplied to enable
calibration of the sensors in the field without dismantling them.

4.2.1.5.3.2 Methane, Hydrogen and Hydrogen Sulphide Calibration gas shall be supplied.
Sufficient quantity of calibration gas shall be supplied to enable complete
calibration, testing, inspection of all sensing heads during commissioning and
successive two time’s complete calibration during post-commissioning
period.

4.2.1.5.4 Extinguishant

4.2.1.5.4.1 Areas protected by extinguishant shall have warning lights and alarms, both
on the inside and outside of the enclosure that will be activated prior to and
during the release of extinguishant.

4.2.1.5.4.2 Two lights shall be provided apart from a blue flashing strobe. One of the
lights shall be used to indicate “Extinguishant release imminent” and the other
to indicate “Do Not Enter – Extinguishant Released”.

4.2.1.5.4.3 The release of the extinguishant shall be indicated on the F&G panel and the
DCS.

4.2.1.5.4.4 A manual release station and a lockable inhibit valve shall be provided at the
entrance to the protected area.

4.2.2 CONTROL DEVICES

4.2.2.1 GENERAL

4.2.2.1.1 The F&G Control components shall be located in safe area on the platform.

4.2.2.2 FIRE & GAS DETECTION SYSTEM PANEL

4.2.2.2.1 The Fire & Gas detection system panel for Scheme - A shall constitute the
following:
a) Controller / Monitor Cards, Control & other auxiliary components like
logic relays, auxiliary relays, power distribution for detectors-flashing
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 18 of 35

alarm beacons-sounders, etc. or F&G SIL 3 PLC (as per Basic Bid
Work) shall be installed in the SAFE area and housed in Electrical /
RTU/Telemetry Interface Cabinet (TIC) Room. [PLC shall be provided
as per Functional Specification No. MR / OD / INST / FS / C101.]
b) For confirmed HC, H2 & H2S gas release separate SPDT volt free
contacts shall be provided for RTU connection.
c) Fire & Gas system panel shall be interfaced with Pneumatic Shutdown
panel to confirm to SAFE chart requirements.
d) Hooter shall be provided for alarms only.
e) The front panel mounted Gas/Fire detection controllers/monitors shall
be installed in mating cases or mounting bins recommended and
supplied by the manufacturer for panel mounting. All wiring to these
controllers shall be terminated on terminal blocks and/or multipin
connectors provided as an integral part of the case. Routing calibration
adjustments shall be accessible from the front of the panel without
having to remove any wiring or causing loss of the instrument function.
In addition total removal of the instrument and replacement with a spare
shall be possible from the front of the panel.
f) The modules shall be plug-in type permitting the removal of the
modules without disturbing the system wiring. Each module shall have
a maximum of 4 channels (one detector per channel) per modules.
Gas/Fire circuit shall be so designed that any channel can be put out of
service for repair, without affecting the other.

g) Each module shall have the following:


(i) Reset Button to acknowledge / reset alarm
(ii) Test button for Operation Check
(iii) Calibration switch, which when put in calibration mode shall
inhibit operation of alarm output, enable checks for alarm LED's
and reference level and also permit access to meter fine zero, meter
span and alarm level contacts.
(iv) Automatic malfunction detection in case of open circuit (sensor
element and line breaking), over range, short circuit and earth
fault.
(v) Indicator LEDs for the following: Malfunction warning for each
channel, Power on, Calibration mode, Test mode, Low alarm for
each channel, High alarm / trip for each channel.
(vi) Alarm Contact: For each detector, module shall be able to generate
minimum 2 independently adjustable (adjustable over entire range
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 19 of 35

of detection) SPDT relays for each alarm level for the purpose of
alarming & logic solving.

4.2.2.2.2 The Fire & Gas detection system panel for Scheme- B shall constitute the
following:
a) Fire & Gas detection system panel for Scheme- B shall be SIL-3 PLC-
based providing independent automatic control. PLC shall be provided
as per Functional Specification No. MR / OD / INST / FS / C101.

b) Fire & Gas detection system panel shall be interfaced with the following
systems of the platform and confirm to Safety requirements:
- ESD system.
- Pneumatic Shutdown Panel / Charging Panel
- Central Control Panels for package items (such as Gas Turbines,
Process gas compressors, etc)
- Paging system for alarm tones
- Flashing Beacons & Sounders
- Extinguishant systems
- HVAC System
- Deluge panel
- Diesel and electric fire water pumps
- DCS for graphic displays

c) Besides PLC related cabinets other main components of Fire & Gas
Detection system panel shall be:
(i) Critical Annunciator Panel.
(ii) Matrix panel.
(iii) Common Facilities.

d) Critical Annunciator Panel: Annunciator Panel shall be provided for


critical alarms. The annunciation sequence shall be as per ISA-S18.1,
‘Annunciator sequences and specifications’. The annunciation lamps
shall be capable of removal and replacement from the panel front via
individual snap out windows or a swing out hinged door on which all
windows are mounted. Minimum critical alarms to be provided are
given below:

(i) Line monitoring fault.


(ii) Gas detection malfunction.
(iii) Fire detection malfunction.
(iv) Fire Water Pump (FWP) common alarm.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 20 of 35

(v) FWP- Start.


(vi) FWP- Failed to Start.
(vii) FWP- Off.
(viii) FWP- Shutdown.
(ix) FWP- On Manual.
(x) Fire water header Pressure- Low.
(xi) Diesel Generator- Running.
(xii) Diesel Generator- Fault.
(xiii) Diesel Centrifuge- Running.
(xiv) Diesel supply valve- Close.
(xv) Diesel supply valve- Open.
(xvi) Diesel storage tank level- Hi Hi.
(xvii) Gas Fault- Compressor.
(xviii) Instrument Air Pressure- Low Low.
(xix) FSD
(xx) ESD
(xxi) Confirmed H2S detection.
(xxii) Confirmed HC-H2 detection.
(xxiii) Confirmed Fire detection.

e) Matrix Panel: Matrix panel shall provide graphic status of Fire & Gas
Detection system & Fire suppression system area-wise for the entire
platform.
(i) Area-wise status indication shall include the following as minimum:
- Low HC
- High HC
- Low H2S
- High H2S
- Low H2
- High H2
- Flame
- Heat
- Smoke
- Manual Alarm Call point- Fire Alarm.
- Manual Alarm Call point- Platform abandonment.
- Fusible Plug
- Extinguishant- Inhibited.
- Extinguishant- Auto.
- Extinguishant- Manual.
- Extinguishant- Initiated.
- Extinguishant- Released.
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 21 of 35

- Extinguishant- Pressure & Weight loss.


- Deluge- Valve open.
- Deluge- Valve closed.
- Deluge- Pressure.
- System Fault.
(ii) Area-wise control devices shall include the following:
- Extinguishant Auto-Manual-Inhibit 3-way selector switch.
- Extinguishant Manual release Pushbutton.
- Reset Pushbutton.
- Deluge- Open valve.
- Deluge- Close valve.
f) Common Facilities: This shall include F&G system related Shutdown-
alarm switches, Annunciator Pushbuttons, etc.
(i) Alarm & shutdown Pushbuttons shall include the following:
- Abandon platform.
- Gas alarm.
- Fire alarm.
- Manual ESD.
- Manual FSD (Separate for ‘Cellar’ deck and ‘Main’ deck).
- FWP: Start.
- FWP: Stop.
- Diesel Transfer Pump: Start.
- Diesel Transfer Pump: Stop.
- Diesel supply valve: Open.
- Diesel supply valve: Close.
(ii) Selector switches shall include the following:
- Auto / test
- On-Off-Manual (3-way selector switch)
- Lead / Lag (FWP selection sw)
(iii)Annunciator components shall include the following:
- Pushbutton- Lamp Test.
- Pushbutton- Mute.
- Pushbutton- Accept.
- Pushbutton- Reset.
- Buzzer.
(iv) All annunciator components except the alarm horn and auxiliary
contact relays shall be mounted integrally in a protective enclosure.
Mounting clamps which present a flat surface to the front panel face
shall be provided for panel mounting the assembly. All connections
(i.e. trouble contact, speaker, test, acknowledge and test-push-
buttons) shall be made on screw type terminals. Sufficient spares
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 22 of 35

terminals shall be provided to accommodate all spares/future alarm


point in the display. Access shall be provided to allow checking
and/or changing the wiring to these terminal strips.

4.2.2.2.3 The Fire & Gas detection system panel shall be freestanding, self-supporting
cubicle type, fully enclosed construction made of CRCA sheet. The contractor
shall be responsible for matching this panel with the other panels of Control
room.

4.2.2.2.4 Plates shall be cut on Squaring shear to ensure tight flush joints when bolted
together. All sharp edges and corners shall be smoothened off to protect
personnel. The final assembly shall be free of buckles, warps, dents or blemishes.
Steel strips stock shall be edge welded to the back of the panel from face above
and below the cut-outs as required to ensure a rigid, self supporting structure. In
order to reduce the loading on the panel face, channel or equivalent support shall
be run horizontally beneath the module cases/shelves to provide rear support.
The finished panel frame work shall be of sufficient strength to allow
transportation and lifting by a crane, with all instrumentation installed without
causing buckling or deflection. Each panel section shall have four (4) removable
lifting lugs at the top of facilitate handling.

4.2.2.2.5 Hinges shall be full-length type. Doorframes shall be formed in the enclosure to
ensure that the doors fit tightly all around. Doors latches shall be the flush-
mounted, 3-point type with recessed chrome-plated handles. An installed
clearance will be maintained inside the panels to allow for door opening and
access the equipment. Doors shall open outwards of the panel.

4.2.2.2.6 The enclosure and its internal equipment arrangement shall be designed to
provide adequate cooling of panel hardware by natural convection alone. Louvers
shall be provided on the top of enclosures for air circulation purposes along with
exhaust fans, as required.

4.2.2.2.7 All sheet and structural steel shall be vapour degreased after shearing, cutting and
forming and prior to welding. Welded construction shall be used throughout,
except where specifically noted otherwise. All welds shall be continuous on the
pieces being joined. Skip welding is not acceptable.

4.2.2.2.8 Proper precautions shall be taken to prevent material wreckage during the
welding process. All welded surfaces shall be thoroughly brushed chipped and
ground to provide a clean, smooth surface.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 23 of 35

4.2.2.2.9 The entire steel structure is to be sand blasted, phosphatized and painted with two
coats of sealing primer on surfaces. The final finish shall be a minimum of three
coats of non-glossy Admiralty Grey epoxy paint on exterior surface and pale
cream on interior surface. The fabricator shall supply separately one (1)
Kilogram of paint for touch up.

4.2.2.2.10 Panel cutout sizes, instrument supports and stabilizers and panel reinforcements
shall be strictly in accordance with the instrument manufacturer's
recommendations. Cutouts shall not be made with flame production devices.

4.2.2.2.11 Sufficient access shall be provided for all instruments via cable duct/trays to
allow checking and/or changes to the wiring to the instrument case.

4.2.2.2.12 Auxiliary Equipment: All rear of panel equipment (terminal blocks, auxiliary
relays, solid state logic cards, etc.) shall be physically located off the exterior
walls of the panel by means of suitable mounting brackets/plates welded to the
wall prior to finishing and painting. Drilling and tapping the outside walls of the
enclosure for mounting internal equipment is prohibited. The auxiliary
equipment shall be located and arranged for easy access, for calibration and
maintenance. It shall not be necessary to remove any item in order to gain access
to check or remove any other item. All cable runs shall be grouped, routed and
secured to provide a neat appearance and prevent interference with the operation
and maintenance of auxiliary equipment. Auxiliary relays, if used shall be of the
plug-in enclosed type.

4.2.2.2.13 Electrical Construction: The installed electrical equipment component parts and
associated wiring in the panel shall be in accordance with the practices outlined in
NEC, latest edition, for non-hazardous area. The panel itself shall meet the
requirement for NEMA-1 (General purpose in door) electrical enclosure.

4.2.2.2.14 Cables from field shall enter through bottom of the panel through multi-cable
transits.

4.2.2.2.15 Cable glands are to be provided in panel to clamp the incoming/outgoing cables.
Glands shall be of Double Compression type and nickel-plated brass. Gland
plates shall be provided to facilitate cable gland installation.

4.2.2.2.16 The 24V DC main power supply feeder to the box shall be protected by a suitably
sized circuit breaker with manual trip lever. The breaker shall be housed in a
suitable surface mounted enclosure. All components shall be suitable for 24V DC
± 10%. Power distribution to controllers and associated group of auxiliary relays
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 24 of 35

circuits shall be via fused terminals with a blown fuse indicator, and input/output
fuse status alarm.

4.2.2.2.17 Panel Ground and signal ground shall be separate. Signal ground shall be
provided for circuit grounds of Electronic instruments, Detector Circuit shields,
Drain wire of cable shields, I.S. Barrier earth etc. For this purpose an insulated
ground bus bar 25 mm wide x 6 mm thick of copper material shall be provided
which shall run along the entire panel length. Ground wiring shall be directly
connected to the ground bus bar by means of suitable wire lugs. Intermediate
terminals are not allowed. This ground bus bar shall be provided with grounding
terminals at both ends. Terminals shall be compression type suitable for AWG
No. 4 copper ground cable. The same shall be provided on each panel structure
for panel grounding.

4.2.2.2.18 The panel shall be designed such that field wiring from remote sensing head for
Fire & Gas may be terminated directly on the associated detection controller input
terminals, rather than interposing field wiring terminal blocks. All gas and fire
detection circuits shall be grounded as per recommendations of the manufacturer
and good engineering practices. All the detector circuit shields shall be grounded
at the same point as the signal circuit.

4.2.2.2.19 Terminals in a terminal block to be identified by their individual numbers located


integral with the terminal itself. Wiring at terminals shall be identified by the
terminal number and termination service at the other end of the wire. Wiring at
Instr. & accessories such as relays, push-buttons etc. shall be identified by item
tag no. and terminal service at the other end of wire.

4.2.2.2.20 Suitably sized Terminals shall be provided for terminating main power supply
cable. The size shall be decided by the Contractor.

4.2.2.2.21 Internal Fluorescent lighting, working on 110V AC, 50 Hz shall be installed


within the panel to provide adequate lighting for maintenance of equipments. An
On/Off control switch shall be provided for this purpose in a surface mounted
enclosure near both the panel doors. The lighting fixtures must not interfere with
doors or other equipment, which must be accessible and space shall be provided
for Fluorescent lamp replacement. Thermal insulation must be provided, if
necessary to prevent excessive temperature rise in the panel surface of mounted
equipment.
4.2.2.2.22 All major shut down alarms shall be repeated for output to a remote telemetry unit
(RTU). These outputs shall be in the form of SPDT volt free contacts and shall be
terminated separately in the panel at a convenient central location for further
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 25 of 35

connection.

4.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

4.3.1 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY

4.3.1.1 General

4.3.1.1.1 The Contractor shall produce a set of Cause and Effect diagrams during the
design stage reflecting the proposed location / action for review by the Company.
Cause and Effect diagram diagrams shall be as per API RP 14C requirements
together with the requirements of this specification.

4.3.1.1.2 All shutdown interlock and alarm circuits shall be designed to operate in a fail-
safe mode.

4.3.1.1.3 Fire & Gas logics shall be designed to de-energize to actuate gas / fire shutdown
interlock.

4.3.1.1.4 Alarms-
a) In addition to signaling on the F&G matrix and alarm annunciator, fire and
gas detection shall result in separate and distinct audible and visual alarms at
Control room / equipment enclosure room / field area. (Scheme- B)
b) Visual alarms shall be colour coded to the company’s requirements to
distinguish between fire, combustible gas release, and toxic gas. (All
Schemes).
c) For gas detection, distinct visual and audible alarms in the Control room shall
be provided for the two levels of detection. (Scheme- B)
d) Silencing of audible alarms shall not deactivate visual alarms until detection
falls below the alarm level.
e) Fire & Gas Detection system shall be suitably interfaced with platform DCS.
DCS shall have an over view graphic for each F&G zone. The graphic shall
display individual detector analogue value, alarm and fault status, and deluge
valve and extinguishant release status. A separate graphic will display the fire
water pumps run and fault status and fire water pressure. (Scheme- B)
4.3.1.1.5 Detector Voting: Confirmed fire or gas-release shall be indicated by the
following:
(i) 2ooN flame detector (N ≥ 2)
(ii) 1ooN thermal detector (N ≥ 2)
(iii) 2ooN gas detector 60% LEL (N ≥ 2)
(iv) 2ooN smoke detector in Cross Zone (N ≥ 2)
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 26 of 35

‘N’ denotes the quantity of detectors required for covering an area as per the
requirements of this specification in general and clauses 4.2.1.1.3, 4.2.1.2 and
4.2.1.3 of this specification in particular. Each area, viz., each process component
area, each equipment area, each building module area, shall be covered
individually.

4.3.1.1.6 Distinct platform audio-alarm shall be provided for confirmed HC-H2 gas release,
confirmed H2S gas release, confirmed fire through paging system. Dry volt Free
Contacts shall be provided for the input signals.

4.3.1.1.7 Fire alarm shall be actuated by any of the following:


(i) Activation of Fire Detectors as defined above in ‘Detector voting’.
(ii) FSD loop activated pressure switch
(iii)Manual activation of extinguishant from Extinguishant Control cubicles /
stations.
(iv) Deluge valve activation push-button

4.3.1.1.8 All remote gas/fire alarm outputs shall be provided through paging system.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 27 of 35

4.3.1.2 Control Philosophy on Wellhead Platform (for Scheme - A)

4.3.1.2.1 The control actions to be initiated upon fire and / or gas detection on
wellhead- platform are as follows:
Location Fire Or Gas Detection Action
(See Below)
Process area Confirmed Fire (Fusible plugs) 1&4
Process area Confirmed Gas release 2&3
(HC or H2S detector)
Battery room Confirmed Gas release 2
(H2 detector)
RTU/Sw.Gr./VFD Room Confirmed Fire (Smoke, 1&4
Thermal etc.)
Transformer Area Confirmed Fire (Thermal, 1&4
Triple- IR etc.)
1. Alarm- Field Sounder.
2. Alarm- Flashing & Field Sounder
3. Initiate ESD.
4. Initiate FSD, open deluge.
Note: FSD (Fire Shut down) shall close all Shutdown valves including
SSSV and open deluge valves & activate fire water network.
ESD (Emergency Shut down) shall close all Shutdown valves.

4.3.1.3 Control Philosophy on Process Platform (for scheme- B)


4.3.1.3.1 The control actions to be initiated upon fire and / or gas detection on process
platform are as follows:

Location Fire Or Gas Detection Action


(See Below)
Process area Confirmed Fire 1&5
(Flame detectors or Fusible
plugs)
Process area Confirmed Gas release. 1&4
(HC detector or H2 detector or
H2S detector)
Generator enclosure Confirmed Fire. 1&6
(Flame detector or Thermal
detector or Smoke detector)
Generator enclosure Confirmed Gas release. 1&4
(HC detector or H2 detector or
H2S detector)
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 28 of 35

Turbo Compressor Confirmed Fire. 1&7


(Flame detector or Thermal
detector or Fusible Plugs)
Turbo Compressor Confirmed Gas release. 1&8
(HC detector or H2 detector or
H2S detector)
Living rooms, Galley & Confirmed Fire. (Smoke 1&2
kitchen, Store rooms (LQ) detector or Thermal- fixed
detector or fusible  sprinkler)
Emergency generator Confirmed Fire. 1&9
room (Smoke or Thermal-fixed or
Flame detector)
Switchgear rooms Confirmed Fire. 1&6
(Smoke or Thermal- Fixed
detector)
Battery room Confirmed Gas release. 1&3
(H2 detector)
Battery room Confirmed Fire. 1&2
(Smoke or Thermal- rate of rise
detector)
Control room / TG Confirmed Fire. 1 & 10
Control Room / Lab (Smoke or Thermal- rate of rise
detector)
Labs & Process store Confirmed Fire / Gas 1 & 11
rooms (Smoke or Thermal or HC/H2S
gas)
Switchgear rooms/ Smoke/Fumes Detected 1
Control room / TG (Aspiration Detection System)
Control Room

1. Alarm on DCS, Annuciators and Paging system, Indication on Fire & Gas
matrix.
2. Shutdown Power to Living Quarters, trip ventilation system and automatic
actuation of Fire Water spray system / Extinguishant system.
3. Shutdown Power to the concern area, trip ventilation system.
4. Initiate ESD and trip unit.
5. Initiate FSD and open deluge valve of the detected zone/area
6. Initiate FSD, trip unit, release extinguishant instantly.
7. Initiate FSD, Trip unit in ventilation mode, trip ventilation system, release
extinguishant instantly (GG-PT Enclosure) / open deluge valve
(Compressor area).
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 29 of 35

8. Initiate ESD, Trip unit in ventilation mode and trip ventilation system.
9. Trip unit and ventilation system and release extinguishant instantly.
10. Initiate FSD, trip unit and release extinguishant after some time delay.
11. Shutdown Power to the concern area release extinguishant after some time
delay.

Note: i) FSD (Fire Shut Down) shall close all Shut Down Valves, shall
open blow down valves, shall start firewater pumps and open
deluge valves / Release extinguishant.
ii) ESD (Emergency Shut Down) shall close all Shut Down valves,
trip the main generator set and start the emergency generator.

4.4 SPARES PHILOSOPHY


This clause shall be read in conjunction with the IDC clause no. 3.6.4.8
(Instrument Spare Philosophy).
4.4.1 In Scheme- B, installed spares for PLC shall be as per Spec. no. MR / OD /
INST / FS / C101, ‘Functional specification for PLC’.

4.4.2 For installation, testing, commissioning of Fire & Gas detection system
vendor shall recommend and provide all the necessary spares. These spares
shall be properly & separately packaged with clear marking- ‘Commissioning
Spares’.

4.4.3 Vendor shall include along with the proposal a separate priced list of
recommended spare parts for one year normal operation and maintenance.
This list should take into account related factors of ‘Fire & Gas detection
system’ reliability, effect of downtime upon normal operation & safety and
availability of servicing facilities.

4.5 Material

4.5.1 Fire & Gas Detectors

4.5.1.2 The Fire & Gas detectors shall have SS 316 sensor body housing material.

4.5.1.3 Enclosure for sensor electronics shall be copper-free marine grade Aluminum
suitable for offshore marine environment.

4.5.2 For panels refer to 4.2.2.2 clause of this specifications.

5. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 30 of 35

5.1 The protection requirements for the components of the Fire and Gas Detection
System shall in general be as per clause no. 3.6.4.4 of Instrumentation Design
Criteria.

5.2 The fixed gas detectors shall be provided with manufacturer-approved rain
hoods. Shop fabricated rain hoods shall not be used.

6.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

6.1 The installation requirements for the components of the Fire and Gas
Detection System shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.6 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

6.2 All detectors shall be installed such that they are easily accessible from a
walkway or access platform for calibration and maintenance. Where this is
not possible, test tube connections for detector calibration shall be provided.

6.3 All field equipment shall be readily accessible without the need to move other
items or equipment, except ceiling and floor tiles in the case of concealed
detectors.

6.4 All components of the fire & gas detection system panel, which require
regular maintenance and / or monitoring, shall be easily accessible to the
operations and maintenance personnel with minimum wiring removal and no
special tools.

6.5 Maintenance space requirement shall be kept to a minimum without


compromising ease of maintenance.

7.0 TESTING & INSPECTION

7.1 Inspection category of Fire & Gas detection system is B. Equipment / items
shall be inspected by company representative only at final stages as per
project finalized documents viz. Purchase specification (s), applicable project
documents, vendor documents at vendor’s works, in addition to stage
inspection by contractor and / or third party inspection agency.

7.2 Calibration, inspection and testing requirements shall in general be as per


clause 3.6.4.7 of Instrumentation Design Criteria. However, for specific
requirements this specification shall also be followed.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 31 of 35

7.3 Prior to shipment from vendor’s works vendor shall carry out 100 percent
testing of hardware and software of Fire & Gas detection system in the
presence of company representative / Third Party Inspection Agency-
representative .
7.4 After finalisation of testing procedures Vendor / Contractor shall notify to the
company one month before the scheduled date of testing of Fire & Gas
detection system.

7.5 Vendor / contractor shall provide complete documentation and facilities


including consumables to allow testing of Fire & Gas detection system.

7.6 The minimum requirements for testing of Fire & Gas detection system shall
be:
a) Visual, dimensional, workmanship checks.
b) Internal inspection reports verification.
c) Test certificates, Material test certificates, Statutory certificates
verification.
d) Verification of components of Fire & Gas detection system (type, size,
configuration, ratings, etc).
e) Wiring check- visual check (type, size, segregation ferruling, etc),
continuity test, and insulation test.
f) Functional check: Gas detectors- Each detector shall be subjected to
calibration check. Inject test gas and check analogue readout and alarms
as per this spec requirement. Test filters shall be used wherever required.
g) Functional check: Heat detectors- Each detector shall be subjected to
calibration check.
h) Functional check: Flame detectors- Each detector shall be subjected to
testing and shall be powered for a minimum of 2 hrs before testing.
i) Functional check: Smoke detectors- Apply manufacturer approved test
fluid to each detector for testing.
j) Other field devices including Flashing beacons, sounder, etc shall be
tested for their functions.
k) Test all shutdowns in accordance with the ‘Cause and Effects diagrams’.
l) For ‘Loop testing / acceptance’ testing, ‘Panel’ inspection / testing, etc
refer to ‘Design Criteria- Instrumentation’.
m) Fire & Gas detection system shall be subjected to elaborate ‘Factory
Acceptance Test’ (FAT) at vendor’s works. After successful installation
system shall under-go ‘Site Acceptance Test’. For ‘Scheme- III’ vendor
/ contractor shall also refer to Spec. no. MR / OD / INST / FS / C101,
‘Functional Specifications for PLC’.
n) The Vendor shall demonstrate the design life and overall system
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 32 of 35

availability. Full details of the operating design life of all major


components that will be subjected to planned maintenance / replacement
during the life of the package, shall be provided by the Vendor.

7.7 Responsibility of proper installation, site testing, commissioning of Fire &


Gas detection system shall be with the contractor. However, Fire & Gas
detection system vendor shall provide all the necessary assistance, supervision
services, etc for successful installation, site testing, commissioning of the
system.

7.8 Gas Detector Calibration- general considerations.

a) All fixed gas sensors shall be capable of direct calibration at the sensor
head from deck level or from a fixed platform, without the need to open
the detector enclosure.

b) A kit shall be provided for detector calibration and testing. Tubing to


conduct sample to the sensor head shall be provided.

c) Test filters shall be supplied for calibrating open-path detectors to 1, 3


and 5 LELm.

d) Calibration of all detectors shall be possible either from remote location


or via hand-held calibration tool, without disconnection of any
equipment or cables. On-line calibration of detectors shall be possible.
Methane calibration gas shall be supplied in sufficient quantity for
calibration of all sensing heads.

e) Gas detectors installed inside HVAC ducts shall be provided with


collecting cones and a facility to calibrate the gas detectors externally
from the ducts without disturbing the installation.

7.9 Fire / Heat / Flame Detectors

a) Kits for testing and calibrating the fire detectors shall be provided.

b) All fire sensors shall be capable of direct calibration at the sensor head
by one person from deck level or from a fixed platform.

8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE


8.1 The Contractor shall submit complete QA / QC plans for the proposed Fire &
FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 33 of 35

Gas detection system for Company’s review.

8.2 The vendor, and his sub-vendor, shall operate a quality system satisfying the
applicable provisions of ISO 9000 (series). A detailed quality plan shall be
provided with the bid.

8.3 The company reserves the right to carry out quality and technical review at
both vendor’s and sub-vendor’s works.

9.0 DOCUMENTATION

9.1 The documentation requirements shall in general be according to clause


3.6.6.2 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

9.2 Specifically for Fire & Gas Detection system following minimum documents
shall be submitted:
Type of
S.N. Document Name
Document
Following documents shall be generated by the contractor and shall be included in
main DCI of the project. These documents shall be provided to the vendor to aid
design & engineering of Fire & Gas detection system.
1 F & G detectors, other field devices layouts. FR
2 Cause & Effect diagrams. FR
3 System I / O listing / point configuration database FI
Information for displaying all displays and reports FI
4
(For Scheme- III only)
5 F & G Cable schedule FI
6 Control room layout- F&G system details FR
Following documents shall be generated by the vendor. Before submitting the
documents for review / information to the company contractor shall verify &
confirm the documents in respect of approved PS requirements.
7 Package Schedule FI
8 Document index & schedule FI
9 System configuration drawings FR
10 Logic print-outs / diagrams FR

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 34 of 35

Operator / Engg. station print-outs (Scheme- III FI


11
only)
Specifications & General Arrangement – Internal FI
12
Arrangement drawings of Panels / consoles
13 Power distribution plan FI
14 Grounding plan FI
15 Power consumption & heat dissipation details FI
16 PLC nest loading (Scheme- III only) FI
17 PLC wiring drawings (Scheme- III only) FI
18 Loop schematics FI
19 Factory test procedure FR
20 Site test procedure FR
21 PLC instruction manual (Scheme- III only) FI
22 Miscellaneous items catalogs / manual FI
23 Operation, Installation & Maintenance Manual FI
Following documents shall be sent along with the shipment of Fire & Gas
detection system.
24 Packaging list of Fire & Gas components FI
25 Factory test reports FR
26 Quality certificates. FR

Notes:
FR For ONGC Review
FI For ONGC Information

9.3 For other PLC related documents refer to Spec .no. MR / OD / INST / FS /
C101

9.4 Purchase specification shall cover all the details as indicated in ‘Design
Criteria- Instrumentation’. Beside these details indicative formats of the
documents 6, 7, 9, & 18 (typical only for each type of detector, field devices,
etc.) shall also be incorporated in the proposal / purchase specification.

10.0 TAGGING & NAMEPLATES

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
SPEC. No. 3500
Design Division FUNCTIONAL 4
Rev. No.
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 “FIRE & GAS Discipline: Instrumentation
DETECTION SYSTEM. Page 35 of 35

10.1 Tagging & Nameplate requirements shall in general be according to clause


3.6.6.1 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

10.2 For the purpose of tagging field devices including detectors, manual alarm
stations, flashing beacons, sounders, etc following philosophy shall be used:

AAA – BBB – CCC

AAA :Type of Field Device.


BBB :Zone no.
CCC :Device Serial no. in the zone.

11.0 REVIEW & APPROVAL

11.1 Review and approval of purchase specification shall in general be according


to clause 3.6.6.3 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

11.2 F & G detection system related detail engineering documents categorization


shall be as per Cl. No. 9 (including its sub-clauses) of this specifications.

12.0 VENDOR PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

12.1 The Vendor pre-qualification requirements shall in general be according to


clause 3.6.6.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria. Also, refer to Spec. no. MR
/ OD / INST / FS / C101

13.0 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

13.1 The components of the Fire and Gas Detection System shall be prepared for
shipment in accordance to clause 3.6.6.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

14.0 RECEIPT & STORAGE

14.1 Receipt and storage of the components of the Fire and Gas Detection System
shall be in accordance to clause 3.6.6.6 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A DD/SOP/008 TO 015 01 00 21/07/2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 2 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope Of This Document 3
2.0 Standards And Specifications 3
2.1 Reference Specifications 3
3.0 Scope of Supply 3
4.0 Shut Down Panel 4
4.1 Purpose / Application 4
4.2 General 4
4.3 Functional Requirements 4
4.4 System Requirements 6
4.5 Material 14
5.0 Equipment Protection 14
6.0 Installation Requirement 15
7.0 Calibration, Inspection And Testing 15
8.0 Documentation 15
9.0 Tagging & Nameplates 16
10.0 Review And Approval 16
11.0 Vendor Pre-Qualification Requirements 16
12.0 Preparation For Shipment 16
13.0 Receipt And Storage 16
Annexure I Typical Well Control Module (WCM) Layout 17

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 3 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:

1.1 This specification describes the essential considerations in the selection, design,
procurement, engineering, installation, calibration, testing and commissioning of Shut
Down Panel (SDP).

1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, engineering, procurement, packing,
calibration, testing at yard and offshore, shipment to yard and offshore site, installation
and commissioning at site of the Shut Down Panel (SDP).

1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the technical integrity of the Shut Down Panel
offered, including design, materials, manufacture, assembly, testing, performance and
specified engineering services. All activities shall be in accordance with the scope of
supply, functional specification, data sheets and interface information supplied by the
Company.

2.0 STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS:

2.1 Reference Specifications:


a) Specification No. 3.6: Instrumentation Design Criteria

b) Basic Bid Work

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

3.1 The scope of work shall include a Shut Down Panel (SDP) complete with SSV control
(pneumatic / hydraulic), SSSV control (hydraulic), ESD functions, FSD functions, Well
start-up system, Tele-metering functions and other components and / or functionality as
described in this document and in the scope of work. The number of Well Control
Modules required in the SDP, the type of SSV system i.e., pneumatic or hydraulic, etc
shall be as indicated in the Scope of Work.

3.2 The scope of supply shall also include commissioning spares and Mandatory Spares as a
part of the equipment as suggested by the Manufacturer & list of one years’ operational
spares along with other type of spares as indicated in clause 3.6.4.8 of Instrumentation
Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 4 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.0 SHUT DOWN PANEL:

4.1 Purpose / Application:

4.1.1 The purpose of the Shut Down Panel on offshore platforms is to control all safety
shutdown functions of the platform, and thereby ensure safety of personnel and
equipment.

4.2 General:

4.2.1 The Shut Down Panel shall perform platform safety functions such as shut-in of Surface
Safety Valve (SSV), shut-in of Sub-Surface Safety Valve (SSSV), Emergency Shut
Down (ESD) functions, Fire Shut Down (FSD) functions, well start-up functions, etc. as
described in the following document and in the basic bid work.

4.2.2 The SSV, ESD, FSD and well start-up systems shall in general be pneumatic and the
SSSV system shall in general be hydraulic. The functional requirements and system
requirements of these sub-systems shall be as given below in clause 4.3 and 4.4
respectively.

4.2.3 Pneumatic Supply:

4.2.3.1 Pneumatic supply to the panel shall in general be as per clause 3.6.4.2.1 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

4.2.4 Hydraulic Supply:

4.2.4.1 The hydraulic supply shall be as follows:


Hydraulic circuit design pressure: 350 Kg/cm2
SSSV / SSV Actuator swept volume: 1500 ml.
Approximate distance of SSSV header: 200 m

4.3 Functional Requirements:

4.3.1 The Shut Down Panel shall initiate shut-in of all Surface Safety Valves (SSV) under any
of the following conditions:
a) When any one of the points shown in the platform SAFE Chart / P&ID for SSV
shut-in receives an abnormal signal i.e. loss of holding signal.
b) When the associated wellhead pressure gives an abnormal signal i.e. loss of
holding signal.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 5 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

c) When the Common manual reset / shut-in button provided on the panel for each
SSV is activated.
The SSV control system shall be either pneumatic or hydraulic as indicated in the Scope
of Work. The control system required for performing this function shall be as per clause
4.4.1 of this document.

4.3.2 The Shut Down Panel shall initiate shut-in of all Sub-Surface Safety Valves (SSSV)
under the following conditions:
a) After respective Surface Safety Valves have shut-in and / or when any one of the
points shown in the SAFE table / P&ID for SSSV shut-in receives an abnormal
signal. A timing circuit shall be utilized to provide a time delay of 3 minutes
(which is adjustable) between SSV shut-in and SSSV shut-in. The time circuit
shall be of pneumatic type only.
b) When the Common manual reset / shut-in button provided on the panel for each
SSSV is activated.
The control system required for performing this function shall be as per clause 4.4.2 of
this document.

4.3.3 The Shut Down Panel shall initiate platform ESD and / or FSD as per the platform SAFE
charts. The system requirements for performing ESD and FSD functions shall be as per
clause 4.4.3 of this document.

4.3.4 The Shut Down Panel shall use the following control signals for the different shut down
circuits:

General Shut Down Circuit: 0 or 3.5 Kg/cm2 (Pneumatic)

SSV Shut Down Circuit: 0 or 7.0 Kg/cm2 (Pneumatic) or


105 to 210 Kg/cm2 (Hydraulic)

SSSV Shut Down Circuit: 200 to 300 Kg/cm2 (Hydraulic)

The well shut in pressure shall be as per process design criteria.

4.3.5 The Shut Down Panel shall be capable of telemetry and tele control of all parameters
shown in the platform SAFE Charts and P & IDs. The shutdown system shall be capable
of operation even when the telemetry system is not installed or communication failure
takes place. The system requirements for achieving this function shall be as per clause
4.4.4 of this document.
4.3.6 The SDP shall be capable of initiating remote opening of individual SSVs. Remote
opening of individual surface safety valves (SSV) shall be achieved only after initial

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 6 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

start-up and commissioning and shall be effective only when all the conditions specified
in the platform Safe Table /P&ID are in healthy state. The opening of surface safety
valves (SSV) and any other valve through Telecontrol shall be accompanied by
automatic starting of an audible alarm with different tone. This audible alarm shall sound
for maximum time of three (3) minutes unless reset earlier. Visual indication for the
same shall be provided at the panel front on well control modules.

4.3.7 The SDP shall have a Well Start-up system for manual opening of individual wells since
pneumatic supply is generally not available on the platforms for initial start-up of the
wells. These operations shall be accomplished by operating hydraulic pumps manually.

4.3.8 The logics in the SDP shall take care that after tripping, the system is not be brought
back to normal, unless, “RESET” is actuated and tripping conditions have come back to
normal.

4.3.9 In case of shutdown, the air supply to the hydraulic pumps shall be cut off until
shutdown signal is normalized and the ESD is reset manually. Vendor shall ensure the
same in the logic.

4.3.10 It is the responsibility of vendor to design the logic in such a way that after tripping any
shutdown valve, the valve shall not open automatically until the signal causing the trip is
normalized and the operator opens the valve using manual reset of that particular valve.

4.4 System Requirements:

4.4.1 Surface Safety Valve (SSV) Control System:

4.4.1.1 The control signal for Surface Safety Valve (SSV) control system shall be as per clause
4.3.4 above and the supply for the SSV control system shall be either pneumatic or
hydraulic as per clause no. 4.2.3 or 4.2.4 above respectively.

4.4.1.2 Each SSV circuit shall have a permit circuit connected to its associated SSSV circuit, to
prevent the SSV opening before the SSSV as well as to shut the SSV, if the hydraulic
pressure to the SSSV is interrupted or decreased. This circuit shall consist of a high-
pressure hydraulic pilot, timing system and 3-way valve. This pilot shall be set at
approximately 200 kg/cm2g.

4.4.1.3 The bulkhead fittings to the individual SSV shall be suitable for 3/8” O.D. 6000#
tubings.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 7 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.4.2 Sub-Surface Safety Valve (SSSV) Control System:

4.4.2.1 The control signal for Sub-Surface Safety Valve (SSSV) control system shall be as per
clause 4.3.4 above and the hydraulic supply for the SSSV control system shall be as per
clause no. 4.2.4 above.

4.4.2.2 The SSSV control system shall comprise of SSSV equalize system and SSSV primary
system.

4.4.2.3 SSSV Equalize System:

4.4.2.3.1 The purpose of this system is to apply initial pressure to the SSSV, to enable the
difference in pressure between primary system and start-up system to equalize, without
applying unnecessary shock to the SSSV. A manual 3-way selector valve shall be
provided on the panel front to select primary / start up header.

4.4.2.3.2 The bulkhead fittings to the individual SSSV shall be suitable for 3/8" O.D. 316 SS
tubing and their rating shall be 6000#.

4.4.2.4 SSSV Primary System:

4.4.2.4.1 The SSSV primary loop shall be connected to SSSV start-up loop. The SSSV primary
loop shall not have entry to the SSSV till the SSSV equalize pressure is obtained. This
shall be automatically achieved by use of hydraulic pilot.
4.4.2.4.2 The SSSV's shall be provided with redundant return line connected to redundant return
header. This header shall be provided with relief valve and pilot valve. The pilot valve
shall operate from SSSV shutdown system with suitable adjustable time delay.

4.4.2.5 Hydraulic System for SSSV ( and for SSV system wherever applicable):

4.4.2.5.1 The hydraulic system shall consist of pumps, reservoir, accumulators, headers and other
accessories as required. The relief valve shall be provided in the system based on design
pressure given elsewhere. The reservoir and accumulator sizing is to be carried out by
the Vendor and all calculations are to be submitted to company for approval. Pump
exhaust shall be vented outside the panel through flame arresters in case instrument gas
is used.

4.4.2.5.2 The accumulator header shall be 1" XXX SS 316 with 6000# SS 316 fittings. The
hydraulic tubing shall be 316 SS 3/8" OD with 0.049" wall thickness.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 8 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.4.2.5.3 Pneumatic ( electrical type where PLC based SDP is asked in the scope of work)
pressure pilot shall sense low hydraulic pressure in the system and it shall cause
shutdown in the same way as defined for PSL on instrument air/gas header.

4.4.2.5.4 Hydraulics supply to header shall be through line size dual filters with necessary
isolation and differential pressure indication. Hydraulic fluid shall meet its functional
requirement in high pressure application as described in the scope of work.

4.4.2.5.5 All hydraulic pumps shall be gas/air driven as well as hand operated. Each pump
discharge shall be provided with relief valve and external check valves. Each pump-
suction shall have suction strainer and differential pressure gauges across it. The pump
for start up header shall have panel front mounted filter regulator.

4.4.2.5.6 Wherever regulators are used to derive a particular pressure level the same shall be
achieved using dual redundant isolation valves, regulators and relief valves.

4.4.2.5.7 The accumulators shall be provided to take care of leakage in the system and shall be
capable of one operation of all valves of one dual completion well in case of failure of
hydraulic pumps.

4.4.2.5.8 The accumulators shall be provided with isolation and drain valves.

4.4.2.5.9 Each pump exhaust shall be tube connected to the panel exterior with suitable exhaust
header.

4.4.2.6 Reservoir System for SSSV ( and for SSV system wherever applicable):

4.4.2.6.1 The reservoir shall have an oil volume of 75 litres minimum Vendor to check and
provide correct volume as required considering future requirements and adequate air
gap. The reservoir system components shall be in SS 316 material.

4.4.2.6.2 A relief tube, properly sized shall be placed between the hydraulic drain header and the
reservoir.

4.4.2.6.3 The reservoir shall have the following accessories:


i) Oil filter strainer for fill in connection
ii) Air filter/flame arrester
iii) Sight glass
iv) Drain plug
v) Clean out opening

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 9 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

vi) The common drain header shall be 3/4" Sch. 40 316 SS pipe.
vii) The reservoir system shall include pneumatic gas / air driven pumps with a
hand pump to keep the hydraulic system pressurized for opening SSVs /
SSSVs.
viii) Low level switch (potential free contacts)

4.4.3 ESD / FSD System:

4.4.3.1 The ESD and FSD Systems shall be pneumatic in general. The control signal for these
systems shall be as per clause no. 4.3.4 above.

4.4.3.2 The SDP shall accommodate the charging and detection system for ESD on the platform.
One manually actuated ESD valve shall be mounted on the panel to perform ESD
functions. Panel shall have provision for quick charging facility of ESD loop.
4.4.3.3 The SDP shall accommodate the charging and detection system for FSD and Fusible
Plug Loop on the platform. One manually actuated FSD valve shall be mounted on the
panel to perform FSD and Fusible Plug Loop functions. Panel shall have provision for
quick charging facility of FSD and Fusible Plug loop.

4.4.4 Telecontrol System:

4.4.4.1 Explosion-proof cum weatherproof pressure switches shall be provided in the panel for
telemetry of the required parameters.

4.4.4.2 Explosion-proof cum weatherproof solenoid valves shall be provided in the panel for
tele control of the required parameters. These solenoid valves shall be pulse operated,
magnetically latched type and shall not draw continuous power in both the open and
closed states.

4.4.4.3 RTU bypass valves shall be provided at the back of the panel with wire seal to prevent
inadvertent operation.

4.4.5 Components and Construction of the Shut Down Panel:

4.4.5.1 Panel Construction:

4.4.5.1.1 The Shut Down Panel shall be Removable Modular type, Skid-mounted and Free
standing. The Panel shall be of Welded construction.
4.4.5.1.2 The Panel front shall be smooth and flat. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever required
to prevent buckling due to weight while operating the switches.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 10 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.4.5.1.3 To ensure rain tightness, cracks around bolts, lifting eyes, panel-mounted instruments
etc. shall be sealed with suitable media.

4.4.5.1.4 The bulkhead fittings and electric conduit connections shall be located on the Left/ Right
side of the panel.

4.4.5.1.5 The panel shall have lifting eyes to facilitate handling during transportation and
installation.

4.4.5.1.6 All internal braces and supports shall be fabricated from stainless steel.
4.4.5.1.7 The panel shall be of welded construction all around and all buff welds are to be ground
smooth. Filter welds require no grinding provided they are neat in appearance.

4.4.5.1.8 The double door type panel shall have swing out rear doors hinged with a continuous
stainless steel hinge fully gasketted and held closed with a heavy T bar latch. The panel
door shall also have lock and key arrangement. The Back-side Door shall be opened
fully without any hindrance and latching mechanism to held the door open position for
O&M purposes.

4.4.5.1.9 The panel shall be self-standing with channel frame at the base to support all the heavy
items such as pumps, accumulator reservoir. A drip pan with ¾” drain valve shall be
provided covering entire base of panel.

4.4.5.1.10 The components mounted on the panel shall be easily accessible for routine maintenance
with minimum tubing removal. All panel front components required for operation and
operator's observations shall be mounted at 600 to 1800 mm elevation from grade.

4.4.5.1.11 Engraved name plates shall be fixed by SS 316 screws at appropriate positions.
4.4.5.1.12 Arc suppression diodes shall be provided across solenoid valve terminals.
4.4.5.1.13 Cable entry size for solenoid valves provided for gas detection system shall be 3/4"
NPT (F).

4.4.5.1.14 Separate junction boxes shall be provided outside on the panel for telemetry and
telecontrol parameters. Multicore cable entries to each junction box shall be 1 ½” NPT
(F) minimum. Junction Box to be located outside /inside(preferably) on the Shut Down
Panel.

4.4.5.1.15 The tubing within the panel shall be:


i) 3/8” OD x 0.049" for ESD/FSD Loop
ii) 3/8" OD x 0.049" for Hydraulic tubing
iii) 1/4" OD x 0.035" for other pneumatic tubing

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 11 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.4.5.1.16 The tubing shall be SS 316, seamless & fully annealed. Double ferrule 316SS tube-
fittings with ASTM-F-1387 compliance of reputable make from ONGC approved
vendor list shall be used and shall be as per FS-3507 (FS for Instrumentation Bulk
Material).
Fittings/ tubing / Instrument valves and accessories shall meet all the functional
requirements of FS-3507.
4.4.5.1.17 External connection for SSSV, SSV, ESD Loop and FSD Loop shall be suitable
for 3/8” OD 316 SS tubing and for other shall be suitable for 1/4" OD 316 SS tubing.
4.4.5.1.18 All components and logic devices inside the panel shall be made of SS 316. Block and
bleed logics / relays shall be used.

4.4.5.1.19 The panel shall provide the following, in case of abnormal process conditions:
a) Visual indication
b) Audible alarm (the alarm shall sound for a maximum of 3 minutes, unless
reset earlier)

4.4.5.1.20 The pneumatic supply header shall be 3/4" SS 316 pipe. A 1/2" drain valve shall be
provided at the end of supply header opposite to the supply connections. The pneumatic
supply to the panel shall be through dual filter regulators with isolation valves, pressure
gauges, shuttle valve and relief valve.

4.4.5.1.21 Low instrument air/gas supply pressure in the panel shall be sensed by pneumatic
pressure pilot (set @ 5 kg/cm2g) and it shall cause shutdown in same way as defined for
PSL on Instrument air/gas header.

4.4.5.1.22 The panel shall provide a manual by pass for individual relays except ESD, FSD, low
hydraulic pressure, and low pneumatic pressure in panel, 60% LEL in gas detection
system and 50-ppm H2S signal in case of platform handling Sour Well Fluid. These
manual bypass valves shall be provided at panel back with wire seal.

4.4.5.1.23 Manual override facility (for start up alone) shall be provided, for all trip conditions,
except, ESD, FSD, 60% LEL gas, and 50-ppm H2S detection (in case of platform
handling sour well fluid). This shall release as soon as the trip condition returns to
normal.
4.4.5.1.24 All incoming and outgoing signals shall be as per approved P&IDs & SAFE Chart, and
other sections of this Bid document. The Vendor shall check and provide all logic and
all other components as required.

4.4.5.1.25 All Remote operated solenoid valves except remote ESD XSV shall be provided with
Block and By-pass Valves.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 12 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.4.5.1.26 Manual shut-in / Reset valve shall be provided for each SSV, SSSV, XSDV and any
other output for shutdown purpose.

4.4.5.1.27 All manually controlled valves shall be panel front mounted.

4.4.5.1.28 Local closing facility for Main line XSDV shall be provided.

4.4.5.1.29 Panel front mounted liquid filled pressure gauges shall be provided, for pneumatic
supply pressure, hydraulic supply pressure, each input signal pressure and each output
signal pressure. All pressure gauges are to be provided with isolation valves.

4.4.5.1.30 Laminated photocopy of the Logic diagram shall be pasted on the inside of the SDP
door.
4.4.5.1.31 The indicative dimensions of the Shut Down Panel shall be as follows: (contractor shall
submit panel internal layout for approvals)
Width: As per no. of modules as described in scope of work.
Height: 2000 mm
Depth: 1200 mm
Door Width: 600 mm (max.)

4.4.5.2 Junction Box Details:

4.4.5.2.1 All electrical components in the shut down panel shall be housed in an explosion proof
junction box outside / inside (preferably) on the panel.

4.4.5.2.2 The junction box shall house all electrical components that are a part of the shut down
panel. This junction box shall be constructed as per FS-3507 and shall be explosion
proof to NEMA 7.

4.4.5.3 Well Control Module Requirements:

4.4.5.3.1 The number of Well Control Modules (WCM) required shall be as per the Basic Bid
Work.

4.4.5.3.2 Each well control module shall have following facilities as a minimum:
• Manual shut in/Reset for each SSV
• Manual shut in/Reset for each SSSV
• Control Supply Pressure Gauge for each SSSV
• Control Supply Pressure Gauge for each SSV
• Remote opening / closing of each SSV

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 13 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

• Three-minute time delay for SSSV shut in, in case of simultaneous shut
in of SSV and respective SSSV.
• Start up and primary manifold
• All incoming lines to module shall be provided with isolation / check
valves before entry to module to facilitate removal for maintenance
purpose.
• Lift Gas and / or Water Injection control logic as per requirement

4.4.5.3.3 In-built Gas Lift Logics shall be incorporated in all well control modules, including all
spare well control modules irrespective of type of well.
4.4.5.3.4 At least one spare well control module shall be provided if not indicated in the basic bid
work.
4.4.5.4 Indicating System:

4.4.5.4.1 The Shut Down Panel shall provide first-out visual indication and audible alarm in case
of any abnormal process condition.

4.4.5.4.2 Pneumatic horn shall be provided for audible horn. The horn shall be mounted at the top
of the panel. The horn shall sound for a maximum time of three (3) minutes unless reset
earlier.

4.4.5.5 Instruments for future facilities:

4.4.5.5.1 The Contractor shall provide all panel mounted instruments and accessories required for
future facilities. The Contractor shall also carry out necessary hook-up inside the panel,
related to spare module.

4.4.5.5.2 The Contractor shall also provide all other materials / equipment (e.g. Interconnecting
cables, junction boxes, cable glands, etc.) required to make the Shut Down Panel
complete and functional.

4.4.5.5.3 Inside the Shut Down panel, lay out of the instruments and accessories shall be in a
manner that all the items and terminals and fittings shall be directly accessible for
maintenance.

4.4.6 PLC based Shutdown panel :

4.4.6.1 PLC based shutdown panel if specified in the scope of work, PLC unit shall be
provided as per FS-C101 and the unit shall be placed in safe location. Pneumatic
shutdown panel unit shall be located in the field and to be integrated with PLC with
suitable interfaces.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 14 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

4.4.6.2 All the field instruments ( PSHL, PT, DPT, TT, FT, etc ) shall be electronic type as per
P&IDs and scope of work. Signals from PSHLs shall be directly hooked up with PLC.
All the functional Logics shall be executed in PLC only . However, the related output
signal ( pneumatic/ hydraulic) to field instruments shall be processed in Pneumatic
shutdown panel unit at site.

4.4.6.3 Overall architecture diagram shall be developed by the contractor/vendor based on


functional requirement as indicated in P&IDs, scope of work and this FS-3501 and
shall submit to company for approval prior to submission of purchase specification
(PS) for Shutdown Panel.

4.5 Material:

4.5.1 The material requirements for Shut Down Panel shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

4.5.2 The material of construction of the various components of the Shut Down Panel shall be
as follows:

Item Material
Skid : Carbon Steel
Panel : 4.0 mm thick SS 316 ( with compatible
panel door)
Components inside the panel : SS 316 (shall meet the requirement of
NACE MR-01-75).
Junction Box : As per FS-3507.

5.0 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION:

5.1 Shut Down Panel protection requirements shall be as per clause no. 3.6.4.4 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.
5.2 Panel shall be weather proof to NEMA 4X.
5.3 Electronic / electrical components like solenoid valves, electric pressure switches,
junction boxes etc., mounted on the panel shall be weatherproof and explosion proof as
per cl 3.6.4.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 15 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

6.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:

6.1 The installation of Shut Down Panel shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.6 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

6.2 All components, which require regular maintenance and / or monitoring, shall be easily
accessible by operations & maintenance personnel, with minimum wiring removal.
6.3 Maintenance space requirement shall be kept to a minimum.

7.0 CALIBRATION, INSPECTION & TESTING:

7.1 Calibration, inspection and testing requirements shall in general be as per clause 3.6.4.7
of Instrumentation Design Criteria. In addition, the following shall also be taken care of:

7.2 Panel shall be completely finished, piped and tested by the Vendor before submitting for
inspection. The panel testing prior to inspection shall be as follows:
• All pneumatic lines and hydraulic lines shall be tested, for leaks by applying 1.5
times the maximum working pressures.
• Wiring Checks (Loop Checks), Continuity Checks
• Utility Consumption
• Internal resistance check and insulation checks for electrical circuits
• Insulation test shall be done for wiring inside the panel.
• Simulation and full functional test (Panels shall be tested by simulating actual
operating conditions.)
• Any additional tests as laid down by the Company

7.3 The Vendor shall perform all other test as required, to place the panel in operating
condition.

7.4 In addition to the tests listed above any other test(s) required for approval shall be
performed to the satisfaction of Purchaser or his representative before shipment.

7.5 Sufficient time, ample space and necessary assistance shall be provided by the Vendor to
assure inspection and testing to the satisfaction of the Purchaser or his Representative.

8.0 DOCUMENTATION:

8.1 The documentation requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.6.2 of


Instrumentation Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 16 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

8.2 The Contractor shall obtain Company’s approval for overall architecture diagram for all
well fluid data monitoring & controls as per scope of work, panel logic diagrams, sizing
calculations for reservoir and accumulator, before proceeding with the panel fabrication.

8.3 The Contractor shall submit complete QA / QC plans for the proposed Shut down panel
for Company’s review / approval.

8.4 The Supplier, and his sub-supplier, shall operate a quality system satisfying the
applicable provisions of BS5750/ISO 9000 (series). A detailed quality plan shall be
provided with the bid.

8.5 The purchaser reserves the right to carry out quality and technical review at both
supplier’s and sub-supplier’s works.

9.0 TAGGING & NAMEPLATES:


9.1 Tagging & Nameplate requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.6.1 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.
9.2 All major equipment shall have identifying nameplates firmly fixed on them.

10.0 REVIEW & APPROVAL:


10.1 Review and approval of purchase specifications and other related documents shall in
general be according to clause 3.6.6.3 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

11.0 VENDOR PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:


11.1 The Vendor pre-qualification requirements shall in general be according to clause
3.6.6.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

12.0 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT:


12.1 The Shut Down Panel shall be prepared for shipment in accordance to clause 3.6.6.5 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

13.0 RECEIPT & STORAGE:

Receipt and storage of the Shut Down Panel shall be in accordance to clause 3.6.6.6 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec No : 3501
Offshore Design Section
SPECIFICATION Rev. No : 4
Engineering Services Disc: Instrumentation
FOR
ISO – 9001:2008 Page : 17 of 17
SHUTDOWN PANEL

ANNEXURE – I
TYPICAL WELL CONTROL MODULE (WCM) LAYOUT

M 13 M7 M1 M3

M6 M8 M2 M4

M 11 M9 M 12 M 10

M5
M 14

SIZE
ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY (INDICATI COLOUR
VE)
M1 PSHL-XXX Flow line Pressure Gauge 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M2 PSHL-XXX Flow line Status 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M3 PSHL-XXX L/G Injection Pressure Gauge 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M4 PSHL-XXX L/G Status 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M5 XSDV-XXX Output Pressure Gauge 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M6 SSSV-XXX Output Status 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M7 SSV-XXX Output Pressure Gauge 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M8 SSV-XXX Output Status 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M9 Push to Shut In / Pull to reset SSV/XSDV-XXX 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M10 SSV-XXX Remote S/D Status 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M11 Push to Shut In / Pull to reset SSSV/SSV-XXX 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M12 Start-up Primary Selector 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M13 SSSV-XXX Output Pressure Gauge 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White
M14 Well-XXX 1 (Per Module) 70 x 20 White

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07..2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 10 OF 10

ANNEXURE - I

FORMAT FOR LISTING OF RTU PARAMETERS

Status
Sr. Signal
Tag No. Service Range Units Remarks
No. Shut Type
Alarm
Down

Note:

The parameters that are to be Tele-metered shall be as per approved P&IDs based on
engineering documents.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 2 OF 10

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope Of This Document 3
2.0 Standards And Specifications 3
2.1 Reference Specifications 3
2.2 Other Specifications to be followed 3
3.0 Scope Of Supply 3
4.0 Telemetry Interface Cabinet 4
4.1 Purpose 4
4.2 General 4
4.3 Cabinet Construction 4
4.4 Power Distribution Box 4
Terminal Blocks And Safety
4.5 5
Barriers
4.6 Cabinet Illumination 5
4.7 Wiring 6
4.8 Cabling 6
4.9 Material 7
4.10 Power Supply 7
4.11 Signal Types 7
5.0 Equipment Protection 7
6.0 Installation Requirement 7
7.0 Inspection And Testing 8
8.0 Documentation 8
9.0 Tagging & Nameplates 9
10.0 Review And Approval 9
11.0 Vendor Pre-Qualification Requirements 9
12.0 Preparation For Shipment 9
13.0 Receipt And Storage 9
Annexure – I List of RTU Parameters 10

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 3 OF 10

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:

1.1 This specification describes the essential considerations in the design, fabrication,
installation, testing and commissioning of the Telemetry Interface Cabinet (TIC).

1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, procurement, fabrication, packing,
testing at yard and offshore, shipment to yard and offshore site, installation and
commissioning at site of the Telemetry Interface Cabinet. The Contractor shall be
responsible for hook-up of relevant field signals to the TIC and making necessary
provisions in the TIC for hook-up of the required signals to the Remote Telemetry
Unit (RTU). The hook-up of the parameters from the TIC to the RTU is, however, not
in the scope of the Contractor

1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for internal wiring up to the terminal Blocks/strip
for all future facilities as well. For all facilities shown as future facilities, the
Contractor shall supply and lay electrical cables from the TIC to the junction boxes to
be located near these future facilities.

1.4 The Contractor shall ensure sufficient design flexibility at the time of detail
engineering to accommodate Company’s operational requirements including ease of
maintenance.

2.0 STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS:

2.1 Reference Specifications:


a) Specification No. 3.6: Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Project SAFE Charts & P & IDs
c) Specification No. 3.5: Electrical Design Criteria
d) Basic Bid Work - Instrumentation

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:


3.1 Every new wellhead platform shall in general be provided with one (1) no. of
Telemetry Interface Cabinet (TIC).

3.2 The Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall include Zener Barrier, Signal Isolator, door
switch-actuated fluorescent lamps for illumination, terminal blocks, Din rails power
distribution box, toggle switches, fuses etc. and all other accessories necessary to
make the system complete.

3.3 The scope of supply shall also include commissioning spares and one years’ spares as
required by clause 3.6.4.8 of Instrumentation Design Criteria, and as suggested by the
Manufacturer.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 4 OF 10

4.0 TELEMETRY INTERFACE CABINET:

4.1 Purpose:

4.1.1 The purpose of the Telemetry Interface Cabinet is to accommodate cable terminations
(input and output) for electrical and electronic instruments required for the purpose of
telemetry, tele-control and remote data gathering applications and providing
conditioned rated power supply for these instruments.

4.2 General:

4.2.1 The location for housing the Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall be as per Basic Bid
Work. In general, the TIC shall be located in the telemetry room/SAFE Area on the
platform, which may not be air-conditioned.
The environmental parameter for equipment installed in non air-conditioned
atmosphere shall be:
The temp range - 10 to 60o C
Relative Humidity – RH up to 95 % non-condensing.

4.3 Cabinet Construction:

4.3.1 The Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall be free-standing type mounted on a Pedestal of
appropriate height or wall mounted type.

4.3.2 The cabinet shall have lifting eyes to facilitate handling during transportation and
installation.

4.3.3 The cabinet shall be of welded construction. All butt welds shall be ground smooth.
Fillet welds may not require grinding, provided they are neat in appearance.

4.3.4 The cabinet shall have a swing out front door hinged with a continuous stainless steel
hinge, fully gasketed and held closed with heavy T-bar latches.

4.3.5 The top and bottom of the cabinet shall be provided with removable gland plates
suitable for direct screwing in of double compression type cable glands.

4.3.6 The cabinet shall be sand blasted, phosphatised and painted with two coats of sealing
primer and a surface coat. The cabinet finish shall be of high quality, semi glossy
melamine resin painting in a colour consistent with other panels on the platform. The
painting procedure shall be as per specifications for Protective Coating (Spec 2005
with Addendum).

4.3.7 A laminated photocopy of the wiring diagram shall be pasted inside the panel door.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 5 OF 10

4.4 Power Distribution Box:

4.4.1 The power distribution box provided inside the cabinet shall consist of circuit
breaker, toggle switch with fuse for individual instruments / circuit / loop, etc.

4.4.2 All switches, circuit breakers, etc. shall be of double pole type.

4.4.3 The power distribution box shall be provided with the components required to cater to
all future facilities as well.

4.5 Terminal Blocks and Safety Barriers:

4.5.1 All wiring to/from the field (other than that of intrinsically safe loops) shall be
terminated at a terminal strip. The wires of intrinsically safe loops shall be directly
terminated on the safety barrier terminals. The type of barriers to be used (i.e., active
or passive) shall be as per the Basic Bid Work.

4.5.2 The terminal blocks shall be flame retardant type. The size of TB shall be not less
than 4 mm. The minimum elevation for the terminals shall be 300 mm from the panel
bottom.

4.5.3 The terminal blocks shall be clip on type having inbuilt fuse with LED indication for
loop status.

4.5.4 Terminal strips shall be spaced at least 125 mm centre-to-centre and 125 mm cabinet
edge-to-centre of terminal strip. Din Rail and terminal strip spacing shall be such that
maintenance shall be easy. The terminal strips shall be 600 V channel mount type.

4.5.5 The terminals shall be of Elmex type made of high-grade melamine suitable for 4.0
mm2 stranded copper conductors. The terminals blocks shall be non-hygroscopic,
vibration proof, stack-on type and shall use captive screws for terminals.

4.5.6 Atleast 20% spare terminals and 20% spare safety barriers shall be provided inside
the cabinet for hook-up of future facilities.

4.5.7 Intrinsic safety barriers shall be arranged in close groups and shall be located as close
to the field wiring entry point as possible.

4.5.8 The barriers shall be electrically insulated from the cabinet frame. The barrier field
terminals shall be covered by an insulator to protect the field wiring from coming in
contact with high-energy source.

4.5.9 The terminal strips and safety barriers shall be mounted in a vertical plane and
elevated to allow for ease of hook-up.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 6 OF 10

4.6 Cabinet Illumination:


4.6.1 A door-switch actuated fluorescent lamp shall be installed inside the cabinet for
providing illumination.

4.7 Wiring:
4.7.1 All wiring shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code
and as per clause 3.6.4.7.7 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

4.7.2 Electronic instrument signal wiring shall be 1.5 mm2-stranded copper. Power wiring
for instruments shall be 1.5 mm2 stranded copper. Other power wiring and earth
wiring shall not be less than 2.5 mm2 stranded copper. All wiring shall be 600 V
grade polyvinyl chloride insulated type.

4.7.3 All wiring shall be adequately supported and protected and shall be accessible from
the TIC front. Power circuits, instrument signal circuits (intrinsically safe) and alarm
circuits shall be segregated in separate wireways.

4.7.4 PVC wire way shall be used to support the wiring inside the cabinet. Wireways shall
be sized to provide at least 20% additional space for future wiring. The PVC
wireways shall be flame retardant type.

4.7.5 All wiring shall be marked with slip-on/sleeves type wire markers at each end.

4.7.6 A minimum 1” x 1.4” copper ground bus bar insulated from the cabinet structure
shall run the entire length of cabinet near the floor level. Compression type terminals
suitable for 4.0 AWG copper ground cable shall be provided at each end of the bar for
connection to platform ground.

4.7.7 All analog circuits shall be grounded at one point only, normally at 24 V DC loop
power supply common along with the analog signal shields and safety barriers.

4.7.8 Ground wiring shall be directly connected to ground bus bar by means of suitable
wire lugs. There shall be no intermediate terminals.

4.8 Cabling:
4.8.1 The cabling requirements shall in general be as per below:

4.8.2 Multi-core and single core armoured cables shall be used to transmit signals from the
field instruments to the TIC.

4.8.3 The cables from the field instruments shall enter the TIC from the bottom of the
cabinet.

4.8.4 The cables to the Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU) shall leave the TIC from the top of
the cabinet.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 7 OF 10

4.9 Material:

4.9.1 The material requirements for Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall in general be
according to clause 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

4.9.2 The cabinet shall be constructed of 3.5 mm ± 10% thick cold rolled steel plates.

4.9.3 All internal braces and supports shall be fabricated of corrosion resistant material
such as galvanized steel.

4.9.4 The frame shall be of 6mm x 50mm x 50 mm angle steel.

4.10 Power Supply:

4.10.1 The power supply for field transmitters shall be 24 V DC + 5 % Negative earthed.

4.10.2 The power supply for solenoid valves shall be pulses of 24 V DC + 5 % V DC


Negative earthed.

4.11 Signal Types:

4.11.1 Outgoing signals to RTU shall be as follows:


a) For analog signal from the field: 1-5 V DC
b) For status signal switches: Potential free contacts
c) For turbine meter pick-up coil signals: Pulse signals.

4.11.2 Incoming signals from the RTU shall be potential free contacts enabling power
supply circuit to field transmitters, solenoid valves and flow totalizers.

5.0 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION:

5.1 Telemetry Interface Cabinet protection requirements shall in general be as per clause
no. 3.6.4.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

6.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:

6.1 The installation of Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall in general be according to clause
3.6.4.6 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

6.2 The Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall be as complete as possible at the Vendor’s
facilities and no further work other than electrical termination shall be required at
platform during erection.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 8 OF 10

6.3 The components mounted in the cabinet shall be easily removable for routine
maintenance with minimum wiring removal.

6.4 All components, which require regular maintenance and / or monitoring, shall be
easily accessible by operations & maintenance personnel, with minimum wiring
removal.

6.5 The package shall be designed such that all maintenance shall be carried out with the
minimum of special facilities.

6.6 Maintenance space requirements shall be kept to a minimum without compromising


ease of maintenance.

7.0 INSPECTION & TESTING:

7.1 Inspection and testing requirements shall in general be as per clause 3.6.4.7 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

7.2 The cabinet shall be completely finished, wired and tested by the Vendor before it is
submitted for inspection.

7.3 The following tests shall be carried out as minimum:


a) Panel shall be tested by simulating actual operating conditions.
b) Nameplates shall be checked for correct spelling and size of letters.
c) Continuity test, internal resistance test and insulation test shall be carried out for
electrical wiring.

7.4 Full details of the operating design life of all major components that will be subjected
to planned maintenance / replacement during the life of the package, shall be
provided by the Contractor.

8.0 DOCUMENTATION:

8.1 The documentation requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.6.2 of


Instrumentation Design Criteria.

8.2 The RTU parameters that are telemetered shall be listed in the format shown in
Annexure – I of this document.

8.3 The following detailed drawings shall be furnished for the Company’s review:
a) Vendor’s shop fabrication and construction drawings
b) Vendor’s wiring diagrams with identifying bill of material
c) Vendor’s proposed design layout for the cabinet
d) Vendor’s nameplate details and lettering

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3502
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 2A
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008
TELEMETRY INTERFACE
CABINET (TIC) Page: 9 OF 10

8.4 The Contractor shall submit complete QA / QC plans for the proposed Telemetry
Interface Cabinet for Company’s review / approval.

8.5 The Supplier, and his sub-supplier, shall operate a quality system satisfying the
applicable provisions of BS5750/ISO 9000 (series). A detailed quality plan shall be
provided with the bid.

8.6 The purchaser reserves the right to carry out quality and technical review at both
supplier’s and sub-supplier’s works.

9.0 TAGGING & NAMEPLATES:

9.1 Tagging & Nameplate requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.6.1 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

10.0 REVIEW & APPROVAL:

10.1 Review and approval of purchase specifications and other related documents shall in
general be according to clause 3.6.6.3 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

11.0 VENDOR PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:

11.1 The Vendor pre-qualification requirements shall in general be according to clause


3.6.6.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

12.0 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT:

12.1 The Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall be prepared for shipment in accordance to
clause 3.6.6.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

12.2 Instrumentation and other equipment, which might be damaged in shipment, shall be
removed and packed separately. The vendor shall ensure that minimum amount of
dismantling is required for shipment.

13.0 RECEIPT & STORAGE:

Receipt and storage of the Telemetry Interface Cabinet shall be in accordance to


clause 3.6.6.6 of Instrumentation Design Criteria

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 1 of 22

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSTRUMENTATION FOR
EQUIPMENT PACKAGE

Rev 1 - Revised for updating ISO Format

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE REV. No.
REVISED BY BY
PAGES
ET RS GRP 22 28.03.2007 1
MC MC AC 22 13.05.2003 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 2 of 22

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope Of This Document 3
2.0 Codes And Standards 3
2.1 Reference Specifications 3
2.2 Other Specifications To Be Followed 3
3.0 Scope Of Supply 3
4.0 Instrumentation For Equipment package 4
4.1 Purpose / Application 4
4.2 General 4
4.3 Electrical Requirements 5
4.4 Unit Control Panels 6
4.5 Control Requirements 6
4.6 Selection Basis for Package Instrumentation 7
4.7 Material Requirements 16
5.0 Equipment Protection 17
6.0 Installation Requirement 18
7.0 Calibration, Inspection And Testing 20
8.0 Documentation 21
9.0 Tagging & Nameplates 22
10.0 Review And Approval 22
11.0 Vendor Pre-Qualification Requirements 22
12.0 Preparation For Shipment 22
13.0 Receipt And Storage 22

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 3 of 22

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:

1.1 This specification describes the essential considerations in the selection, design,
procurement, testing, installation, calibration and commissioning requirements for
instrumentation forming part of equipment packages.

1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of various type of instruments for
equipment packager suitable for their intended application, their procurement, packing,
calibration, testing at yard and offshore, shipment to yard and at offshore site,
installation and commissioning at site.

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:

2.1 Reference Specifications:


a) Specification No. 3.6: Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
d) Specifications of various equipment package (e.g. Functional Specification for
M.I.P., Fine Filter, Fuel Gas Compressor, etc.)
e) Functional Specification for Programmable Logic Controller specification no.
MR / OD / INST / FS / C101.

2.2 Other Specifications To Be Followed:

NIL

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

3.1 The type of instruments to be used with the equipment package and their quantity shall
be as per the process requirements indicated in the Basic Bid Work, the P & IDs and the
functional specification of the respective equipment package.

3.2 The scope of supply shall also include commissioning spares and two years’ spares as
required by clause 3.6.4.8 of Instrumentation Design Criteria, and as suggested by the
Manufacturer.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 4 of 22

4.0 INSTRUMENTATION FOR EQUIPMENT PACKAGE:

4.1 Purpose / Application:

4.1.1 Instrumentation system for equipment package shall provide complete monitoring, local
and remote display, start-up, automatic control, interlock, alarm, normal shutdown and
emergency shutdown for the equipment package.

4.2 General:

4.2.1 The Instrumentation system for the equipment package shall include all items necessary
for the efficient, correct and safe operation of the complete equipment package.

4.2.2 Supply of all necessary items for the equipment package shall be regardless of whether
specifically referred to in the Company’s specifications or not, including the supply of
instrumentation required for control of the equipment installed in pipe work or other
equipment not in Contractors supply, unless specifically excluded in the particular
equipment specification.

4.2.3 The functional requirements of these instruments shall be as per the relevant functional
specification enclosed in the bid document. General requirements as covered in the
Instrumentation Design Criteria shall be applicable to all the instruments forming a part
of the equipment package.

4.2.4 The Contractor shall completely mount, pipe and cable all instrumentation items on the
packaged unit.

4.2.5 All wiring and tubing which requires interconnections with any other equipment
external to the package shall be terminated in appropriate junction boxes and bulkhead
plates, mounted adjacent to the package boundary be the Contractor. The locations and
details of all such junction boxes and plates shall be agreed by Company prior to
installation and clearly marked on the Contractor’s drawings.

4.2.6 Process fluids shall not be piped off the unit for measurement purposes. Measured
variables shall only be transmitted off the package by electronic signals.

4.2.7 Cable entries for outgoing cables shall be clearly marked on the layout drawings,
including the location, size and quantities, and shall be plugged until cable installation.

4.2.8 Equipment package, which requires pneumatic supply for instruments, shall incorporate
a 316SS Supply header of the proper size of the package. The on-package supply
piping shall terminate at the package boundary and the location and size of the supply

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 5 of 22

connection shall be noted on the Contractor’s drawings. Each pneumatic instrument


shall be individually connected to a sub-header and provided with filter regulator and
isolation valve.

4.2.9 Control and shutdown functions shall be segregated by the provision of separate
dedicated instruments, process connections and logic solvers.

4.2.10 Electronic instrumentation transmission signals shall be provided by 2 wire transmitters


giving an isolated 4 – 20 mA DC linear output signal from a nominal 24 VDC supply,
and shall be compatible with having either pole grounded. All field transmitters shall be
microprocessor based; intrinsically safe (IS) “smart” type with HART protocol.

4.3 Electrical Requirements:

4.3.1 The electrical power supply for the instrumentation for equipment packages shall in
general be as per clause no. 3.6.4.2 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

4.3.2 Power supplies and signal voltages shall be as listed below:


Digital I/O : 24 V DC
Analog Signals : 4 – 20 mA Smart signal with HART protocol
Power to control systems : 24 V DC or 110 V AC, 50 Hz single phase earthed neutral
supplies from UPS/Battery Bank

4.3.3 Signal interfaces to other systems shall be as follows:


• Process control system – via redundant serial links and /discrete digital and analog
I/O.
• ESD system – via volt – free contacts, 24 VDC circuit.
• Fire and Gas system – via volt- free contacts, 24 VDC circuit
• Critical Alarms – via. volt-free contacts, 24 VDC circuit.

4.3.4 All terminations shall be made on screw clamp type terminals, correctly certified (Exe)
where necessary. No flying leads shall be used.

4.3.5 Each cable core shall be labeled with a full circular cable ferrule, ‘C’ type are not
acceptable.

4.4 Unit Control Panels:

4.4.1 Where complex equipment packages such as turbo-generators, compressors and gas
chromatographs are supplied with integrated Unit Control Panels (UCP) as a part of the
package such system shall comply with the project specifications.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 6 of 22

4.4.2 Larger UCPs will communicate with the DCS via redundant serial data communication
links and with the ESD and Fire and Gas systems via hardwired signals. Such UCPs
shall be provided with suitable redundant communications ports to allow transmission
of monitoring, control and alarm information via serial interface (RS 232 C, RS 422 or
RS 485 etc.).

4.4.3 This function shall enable the unit to be monitored and controlled from the Central
Control Room (CCR), in addition to the local control and indication.

4.4.4 The Contractor shall ensure robust and secure integration of UCP communications into
the DCS using only standard software modules.

4.4.5 Shutdown and Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS), which are part of UCPs, shall
comply with the integrity requirements arising from the project risk assessment and
PISHAZOP, and IEC –61508.

4.5 Control Requirements:


4.5.1 Operational Requirements:

4.5.1.1 Local panels or field equipment will not normally be manned and therefore, automatic
control systems shall be provided to achieve optimum process operation under the
specified plant conditions. Local indication and manual controls shall be provided to
allow for local monitoring, control, start-up and shutdown of the equipment.

4.5.1.2 A local UCP shall be provided where the grouping of indicators, controls, alarms, etc. is
required for ease of operation or for safety reasons when carrying out manual start-up
and shut down procedures.

4.5.2 Shutdown and Auto Start Requirements:

4.5.2.1 The Control systems shall be designed to automatically ensure a safe shutdown
condition in the event of any malfunction, or when commanded by the platform ESD
system.

4.5.2.2 All shutdown signals, to and from a package, shall be cabled to a dedicated junction box
at the package limit for interfacing with the Platform ESD system.

4.5.3 Alarm Requirements:

4.5.3.1 In general, the alarm signal outputs from equipment package shall be transmitted from
the equipment package through potential free contacts. For larger system, non-critical
alarms may be transmitted to the DCS by serial link.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 7 of 22

4.5.3.2 Where an alarm annunciator is supplied as a part of the equipment package, the
annunciator shall have a “first –out” feature to indicate which of a group of alarm points
operated first.

4.5.3.3 Annunciation of shutdown and auto-start functions shall be provided by a contact


independent of that initiating the control function.

4.5.3.4 Every signal, which initiates a shutdown, shall also have a pre-alarm signal to warn of
an impending shutdown situation.

4.6 Selection Basis For Package Instrumentation:

4.6.1 General:

4.6.1.1 Proven commercial high quality instrumentation shall be utilized with particular
attention to reliability and materials of construction.

4.6.1.2 Instrument parts shall be resistant to the corrosive properties of the process fluid to
which they are exposed and to the external environment.

4.6.1.3 Seals and purges shall be used as necessary, to ensure reliable instrument performance.

4.6.1.4 Housing and exposed parts of field –mounted instruments shall be resistant to the
corrosive environment.

4.6.1.5 All instruments of one type shall be procured from the sane manufacturer.

4.6.2 Control Panels:

4.6.2.1 All enclosures shall be suitable for the environmental conditions specified in the data
sheet for the particular equipment package.

4.6.2.2 Control panels containing PLCs shall be located in non-hazardous areas.

4.6.2.3 Panels for outdoor use shall be fabricated from 316SS, with minimum sheet thickness of
1.5 mm, Panels shall be suitably reinforced to prevent warping or buckling.

4.6.2.4 Free standing Panels of width 1500 mm shall have a 100 mm channel base. Folding
around door opening shall be provided to prevent dust or water lodged on top of the
door from entering the panel when the door is opened. Panels shall have sloped roofs
and guttering to direct water away from doors.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 8 of 22

4.6.2.5 All hinged parts or doors shall be earthed to a fixed part of the frame connected by a
braided strap or fine stranded flexible wire connection.

4.6.2.6 Devices in separate compartments shall be capable of being replaced without shutting
down units in adjacent compartments and without exposing maintenance personnel to
live equipment. Door openings shall be large enough to permit removal of equipment.

4.6.2.7 All control and indicating devices mounted on penetrations shall maintain the IP rating
of the panel.

4.6.2.8 A minimum of 15% of clear mounting space shall be provided for large panels, and
25% for small panels to permit adding future control devices and panel instrumentation.

4.6.3 Flow Measurement:

4.6.3.1 General:

4.6.3.1.1 The Contractor shall select the flow meter best suited to the service whilst considering
maintenance periods and cost. The Company’s preference is to use vortex, Coriolis, or
magnetic flow meters over turbine and PD meters. Vortex meters may also be utilized,
provided they are not installed in areas where vibration will affect accuracy.

4.6.3.1.2 Meter transmitters shall be “Smart” with 24 V DC power supply and 4-20 mA output
and be equipped with a local LCD indicator.

4.6.3.2 Magnetic Flow Meter:

4.6.3.2.1 Magnetic flow meters may be considered where the turn down ratio is less than 1:10
where velocities are <10 m/s and fluid conductivity is >5microsiemens/cm.

4.6.3.3 Coriolis Flow Meter:

4.6.3.3.1 Coriolis meters may be considered where the turn down ratio is less than 1:30. These
may be used for the measurement of hydrocarbon liquid flow and / or density with
process pressure < 40 Kg. /Cm2. Maximum line size shall be DN 80. Consideration
shall be given to the meter pressure drop.

4.6.3.3.2 Where the meter is installed in a bypass line for density measurement, the contractor’s
design shall ensure that the flow rate through the meter provides the accuracy and
response times required by the process.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 9 of 22

4.6.3.4 Ultrasonic Flow Meter:

4.6.3.4.1 Multi path ultrasonic flow meters may be used for measurement of gases and liquids in
accordance with AGA 9. The piping design shall ensure that the meter measures a full
pipe. The Contractor shall ensure that all wetted parts are compatible with the process
conditions. Sensors shall be constructed from 316SS as a minimum.

4.6.3.5 Orifice Plates:

4.6.3.5.1 Flow measurement to AGA 3 and AGA 8 shall generally be carried out by different
pressure measurement across square edge orifice plates with flange tap orifice flanges
or special fittings. Orifice plates shall be concentric for gas flow and eccentric bore for
multiphase flow.

4.6.3.5.2 Other types of orifice plates and methods may be considered for approval where
necessary to satisfy special applications.

4.6.3.5.3 Meter Rangeability shall not exceed 3 to 1, and the design flow shall preferably be
within 0.65 to 0.80 of full range.

4.6.3.6 Flow Nozzles and Venturi Tubes:

4.6.3.6.1 These shall be considered where minimum head loss, and / or high capacity is required
and for use in non-homogeneous fluid with a low percentage of solids and shall be in
accordance with AGA3.

4.6.3.7 Differential Pressure Flow Transmitters:

4.6.3.7.1 Transmitters shall be fitted with 5 way isolation and equalizing manifolds (AISI 316
minimum grade). Mercury type elements shall not be used.

4.6.3.8 Variable Area Flow Meter:

4.6.3.8.1 Variable area flow meters shall be used only for local indication of non-hazardous
fluids. Glass tube meters shall not be used.

4.6.3.8.2 Meters shall be mounted in a vibration free location with pipe work anchored to prevent
stressing of the meter body. The meter shall be suitably protected against mechanical
damage.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 10 of 22

4.6.3.9 Turbine Meter:

4.6.3.9.1 Turbine meters shall be installed directly in the lines with minimum straight run
distances calculated according to API – 2534. Appendix C, but not less than 20 pipe
diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream. A strainer shall be installed
upstream of each turbine meter.

4.6.4 Level measurement:

4.6.4.1 General:

4.6.4.1.1 All components associated with level measurement shall conform to the vessel design
pressure and temperature, and the project specifications for piping design, materials and
fabrication.

4.6.4.1.2 Level transmitters and float switches shall generally be mounted in external chambers
piped to the vessel. To facilitate maintenance testing and calibration, drain points with
piped drain valves shall be provided. Chambers shall be provided with vent and drain
points.

4.6.4.2 Level Gauges:

4.6.4.2.1 Gauge glasses shall be either steel armoured transparent or reflex type. They shall be
provided with isolating valves, plugged drains and vent valves of size DN 15 minimum
except in certain specified applications.

4.6.4.2.2 Gauge glasses shall be selected on a basis of total visible length giving equal visible
coverage above and below the maximum and minimum anticipated operating levels.

4.6.4.2.3 The level gauge shall not exceed 1100 mm visible length.

4.6.4.2.4 Ranges in excess of 1100 mm visible length shall be covered by multiple gauge
assemblies. Visible length of multiple gauges shall overlap by a minimum of 50 mm.

4.6.4.3 Level Transmitters:

4.6.4.3.1 The primary type of level instrument for remote transmission shall be the displacer type.
Other types of instrument may be proposed for the Company’s consideration where
displacers are not suitable.

4.6.4.3.2 Differential pressure transmitters are only to be employed when specific gravity
changes are considered to be negligible.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 11 of 22

4.6.4.3.3 Meter transmitters shall generally be “SMART” with 24 V DC power supply and 4-20
mA output, and be equipped with a local indicator.

4.6.4.4 Level Switches:

4.6.4.4.1 Level switches shall generally be avoided, however where they are required, fixed
displacement or float type switches mounted in an external chamber shall be used.

4.6.4.4.2 Variable displacement type switches mounted in an external chamber shall be employed
where process requirements or operating conditions prevent the use of float type
switches.

4.6.4.4.3 Float switches shall generally have single pole double throw contacts, with contact
rating of 5A, 240 volt. Ac. The position of the float shall determine the set point. The
switch shall have a fixed differential.

4.6.5 Pressure measurement:

4.6.5.1 General:

4.6.5.1.1 All pressure instruments shall be specified with a range approximately twice the
operating pressure except where process conditions dictate otherwise. They shall be
capable of withstanding an over pressure of 25% above the relevant relief valve setting
without permanent set or loss of calibration.

4.6.5.1.2 All pressure instruments shall be provided with individual block and bleed valves as
well as the primary process isolation valve.

4.6.5.1.3 All instrument used for handling viscous or corrosive materials shall be sealed. Seals
may be the chemical type of suitable material and a silicone oil fill between the
diaphragm and the pressure element of the instrument. Capillary tubing shall be 316SS
3 mm OD with 316SS spiral wound armour. Diaphragm seals shall be flush out type.

4.6.5.1.4 Pressure transmitters shall be ‘SMART’ with 24 VDC power supply and 4-20 mA
output, and be equipped with a local indicator.

4.6.5.1.5 Pneumatic transmitters shall have an accuracy of better than 1% of span and wherever
applicable shall be of the indication type. Process connections shall be ½” NPT.
Transmitter output tubing shall be provided with a plugged tee for installation of a
calibrated pressure gauge.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 12 of 22

4.6.5.1.6 Pressure switches shall have single pole double throw contacts, with gold contacts rated
for low energy use 1A at 28 VDC. These switches shall have adjustable differential as
required.

4.6.5.2 Pressure Gauge:


4.6.5.2.1 Instrument range shall generally be selected so that the normal operating pressure
occurs at approximately two-thirds scale.

4.6.5.2.2 Standard ranges shall be used wherever possible. Gauges shall have an accuracy of ±1.0
% FSD and have 25% over range protection.

4.6.6 Temperature measurement:

4.6.6.1 General:

4.6.6.1.1 RTD transducer type Electronic transmitters shall be used for measurement less than
350oC.

4.6.6.1.2 The use of temperature switches shall be generally avoided. Where they must be used
they shall be single pole double throw contacts, rated for 1A at 28VDC.

4.6.6.1.3 Liquid or gas filled thermal systems are not preferred. However, if supplied they shall
be complete with stainless steel bulb, armoured capillary thermowell and union
connection. Alternatively the switch may be of bi-metallic type.

4.6.6.1.4 A thermowell shall be employed at all temperature measuring points except in


exceptional approved applications.

4.6.6.2 Thermowells:

4.6.6.2.1 Thermowells shall be a minimum of 316 SS, shall be flanged and be DN 40 for piping,
DN 50 for vessels. Screwed wells are not acceptable.

4.6.6.2.2 Thermowell extension shall be of sufficient length to ensure sensor head is clear of any
pipe or vessel insulation.

4.6.6.2.3 Sufficient clearance shall be provided to ensure the element can be withdrawn from the
sensor head without removal of any fittings, etc.

4.6.6.2.4 Test wells shall be equipped with a SS 316 plug. Plugs shall be attached to the well by
a SS 316 chain.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 13 of 22

4.6.6.3 Temperature Gauges:

4.6.6.3.1 Dial thermometers shall be adjustable, every angle bi-metallic type. Construction shall
be of SS 316 with external adjustment and accuracy / better than 1% of full scale.

4.6.6.3.2 The range shall be selected so that the normal operating temperature lies at
approximately two-thirds full scale.

4.6.6.4 Temperature Transmitters:

4.6.6.4.1 Electronic transmitters shall be used for all temperature measurements that are to be
displayed in the Control Room. Platinum RTDs shall be the preferred element. Other
sensor types may only be considered when it is demonstrated that an RTD is not
suitable. Transmitters shall generally be “Smart” with 24 V DC power supply and 4.20
mA output and LCD indicators.

4.6.7 Control valves:

4.6.7.1 General:
4.6.7.1.1 Control valves shall normally be located in horizontal lines and with the top work
mounted upright. Locations shall permit easy access for maintenance operations to the
valve body, actuator and any accessories.

4.6.7.1.2 Body and flange ratings shall be in accordance with the piping design and materials
specification. However, the minimum flange rating shall be ASME 300.

4.6.7.1.3 Valve trim shall be SS 316 minimum.


4.6.7.1.4 Control valve shall have tight shut off in accordance with ASME B 16.04 Class IV
unless otherwise specified.

4.6.7.1.5 All components shall be designed so that they fail-safe, i.e. in all failures the valve shall
move to the safe position.

4.6.7.2 Valve Type:


4.6.7.2.1 Globe valves shall be employed for process control purposes in higher DP, low capacity
service.

4.6.7.2.2 Alternative valves as allowed by the piping design and materials specification may be
used subject to Company approval.

4.6.7.2.3 Rotary globe valves (eccentric plug) with stellite facings with plug downstream may be
considered for flashing service.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 14 of 22

4.6.7.3 Valve Body:

4.6.7.3.1 Minimum Control Valve body size shall be DN 25 when the control valve manifold
piping is DN25 or larger.

4.6.7.3.2 Valves in flashing service shall have a body size at least one size larger than that
necessary to contain the calculated trim size.

4.6.7.4 Valve Packing:

4.6.7.4.1 The packing material shall depend upon the service condition. The recommended
packing material is PTFE for services from –200 to 200 deg. C. Flexible graphite
packing with external lubricator and isolation valve shall be used for service
temperatures above 200 deg. C.

4.6.7.5 Control Valve Sizing:

4.6.7.5.1 Valve flow coefficients shall be calculated for each operating condition in accordance
with the equations and methods in ISA 75.01.

4.6.7.5.2 Valve trim size for equal percentage characteristic valves shall normally be selected so
that:
Minimum flow valve travel is 20%.
Normal flow valve travel 60% to 80%.
Maximum flow valve travel 90%.
4.6.7.5.3 Valve trim size for linear characteristic valves shall normally be selected to be between
50 to 70% travel for normal flow. Maximum flow shall not exceed 90% of capacity.

4.6.7.5.4 Butterfly valves shall be sized so that the normal design flow rate does not exceed 60%
opening for throttling service.

4.6.7.5.5 In addition to the selection of valve and trim combination sized to suit the process
conditions, full consideration shall also be given to the inlet and outlet velocities and
possible occurrence of cavitation causing excessive noise, erosion and vibration. All
control valve sizing shall be verified by the valve vendor to ensure suitability to meet the
process requirements.

4.6.7.6 Valve Actuators:


4.6.7.6.1 Actuators shall be sized for operation under maximum shutoff pressure drop across the
valve, with minimum instrument air pressure or voltage to the actuator as specified in
this specification.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 15 of 22

4.6.7.6.2 A safety margin of 1.5 for regularly cycling valves shall be applied. For long standstill
service safety margin shall be a minimum of 2.

4.6.7.6.3 Each valve set shall be fitted with a 316 SS filter regulator air set combination.

4.6.7.7 Valve Positioners:


4.6.7.7.1 Intelligent valve positioners shall be provided for all modulating control valves.

4.6.7.7.2 Valve positioners shall be “smart type” with integral I/P, direct acting and have a spring
range for 4-20 mA signal.

4.6.7.7.3 Positioner by pass shall be fitted except where agreed with the Company.

4.6.8 Emergency and shut down valves:

4.6.8.1 General:
4.6.8.1.1 All shut down /sequence valves shall be of the ball valve type. They shall provide
bubble tight shut off (class VI) with the higher pressure from either direction.

4.6.8.1.2 All shut down valves shall be fail-safe and shall include a pressure accumulator where
necessary to achieve the required action or number of operations on loss of external
operating pressure.

4.6.8.1.3 All shut down valves shall be provided with a beacon type position indicator. Where
specified in the Datasheet, this shall house open and closed position proximity limit
switches. These shall be certified as Intrinsically Safe.

4.6.8.2 Valve Actuator:


4.6.8.2.1 Valve actuators shall be sized to operate the valve in both directions with zero pressure
downstream, and maximum pressure upstream and also with the maximum differential
pressure in the reverse direction. Sizing shall include a 30% safety margin above the
minimum operating torque requirements of the valve at the maximum DP. Actuator
torque shall not exceed the maximum stem shear torque of the valve at the maximum
supply pressure.

4.7 Material Requirements:


4.7.1 The material requirements for the equipment package instrumentation shall in general
be as per clause no. 3.6.4.5 of Instrumentation Design Criteria and as per the Material
Specifications listed in the Equipment/Instrument Specifications and Data Sheets.

4.7.2 Materials used for parts of the assembly not specifically detailed by the Company shall
be selected by the Contractor on the following basis:

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 16 of 22

• Suitability for the specified process conditions.


• Consideration shall be given to the effects of stress corrosion cracking in 316 SS
when in contact with chloride at temperatures above 34deg.C
• Company approval is required prior to the use of aluminium for any instrument
component Aluminium may only be used if no other suitable material is
available from the manufacturer. Aluminum shall not be used for any
component in contact with the process fluid. If aluminium is used for any
housing or component it shall be certified as copper free i.e. less than 0.4%
copper by mass.
• Cast iron shall not be used for any item to which this specification applies.
Ductile iron shall not be used without the Company’s prior written approval of
each item.
• All proposed plastic component shall be non-toxic and fire resistant, UV
stabilized, and compatible with the environmental conditions.
• All spindles, bushing, bolting, screws etc, shall be manufactured from a suitable
grade of stainless steel.
• All molded polyester parts shall be in an anti-static version for hazardous area
locations, and in general be constructed from glass reinforced polyester ultra
violet stabilized. Surface resistance shall be less than 109 OHMS. Impact
resistance shall be –25% (EN 50.14).
• In-line instruments, including valves, shall be specified with suitable materials
in accordance with NACE MR 0175 where H2S is present in significant
concentration.

5.0 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION:

5.1 The protection requirements for the equipment package instrumentation shall in general
be as per clause no. 3.6.4.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

5.2 Control Room Environment: The control rooms shall be normally pressurized and air-
conditioned environments and shall provide an environment in accordance with ISA
S71.01 and ISA S 71.04. These areas shall be subject to the following condition:
Ambient Air Temperature: 21-24oC
Relative Humidity : 45% to 55%
The equipment in control rooms shall continue to operate properly under conditions of
air conditioning failure, when the ambient conditions may rise to 50 o C and 95% RH
for periods up to 8 hours.

5.3 The majority of the field mounted instrumentation will be mounted in a Division 2
hazardous area although some will be located in a Division 1 classified area and some
in a safe area.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 17 of 22

5.4 For reasons of standardization, all field mounted electrical equipment shall utilize the
following methods of protection :-
• All electrical instrumentation equipment except junction boxes and solenoid
valves shall be certified intrinsically Safe Ex “ia” for Class 1, Div. 1, Group D,
Temperature Class T5 minimum.
• Junction boxes to be certified ‘increased safety” Ex “e” for IS circuits and
explosion proof/Ex”d” for non-IS circuits for Class 1 Div.1 Group D
Temperature Class T5 minimum, hazardous area.
• If instrumentation cannot be provided with the above methods of protection,
then alternative methods suitable for the classified area and certified by an
acceptable Authority shall be proposed for the Company’s consideration.

5.5 All certificates and documentation required to satisfy the conditions of the certification
shall be provided (including IS system entity and cable parameter calculations) in the
Hazardous Area Dossier.

5.6 Equipment shall be designed so that, under normal operating conditions, it shall be
unaffected by radio transmissions. A 5 watt RMS hand –held transmitter in the 50-200
and 400 – 460 MHz bands, positioned with the mid points of its aerial no more than 300
mm from the electronic module shall not impair or degrade the performance of that
module.

5.7 All equipment including entries and blanking plugs shall be dust tight and water proof
to IP 65/NEMA 4X. Instruments not classified IP 65 to be subject to Company’s
approval.

5.8 Weather shields shall be installed over Ex ‘d’ junction boxes, and instruments that do
not meet this standard.

6.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT:

6.1 The installation requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.4.6 of


Instrumentation Design Criteria.

6.2 The principles and details of instrument mounting and location shall be selected so as to
have no adverse effect upon signal accuracy and repeatability. Any physical condition
such as mechanical stress, vibration, temperature etc. shall be limited to the maximum
figures specified by the instrument manufacturer by the use of appropriate mounting
methods.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 18 of 22

6.3 Special measures shall be taken to protect engine – mounted instrument from heat and
vibration, and ensure ready accessibility. Cable connecters for such items shall be
sufficiently robust to withstand the conditions and repeated disconnection/reconnection.

6.4 Instruments shall be positioned to provide sufficient space for ease of installation,
removal and maintenance.

6.5 Instrument Mounting:

6.5.1 Instruments shall not be mounted on handrails.

6.5.2 Instruments shall be mounted on DN50 pipe stands (except pressure gauges, dial
thermometers and other instruments which are screwed directly on the line).

6.5.3 Local instruments shall be mounted so that the centerline of the instrument is
approximately 1400 mm above grade or walkway.

6.6 Process and Instrument Connections:

6.6.1 Individual instrument connections shall be provided on process piping and equipment.
Each process connection shall have an isolating valve.

6.6.2 Process piping up to and including the first block valve shall confirm to the vessel or
line classification.

6.7 Tubing & Fitting Installation:

6.7.1 The installation requirements for tubing and fitting shall in general be as per clause no.
3.6.5.3 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

6.7.2 Instrument installation shall be in accordance with API RP 550, the instrument
manufacturer’s instructions and the following:

6.7.3 All Process Impulse Tubing and Fittings shall be rated to suit the design conditions but
the following shall be considered minimum requirements.
• ½” X 0.065” W/T Fully annealed AISI 316 seamless stainless steel tubing to
ASTM A269 or equivalent with hardness less than RB 80.
• Fittings to be AISI 316 stainless steel twin ferrule compression type.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 19 of 22

6.7.4 All pneumatic tubing and fittings shall be in accordance with the following minimum
requirements.
• ¼” O.D. X 0.035” W/T.
• 3/8” O.D. X 0.035” WT.
• ½ “ O.D. X 0.035” W/T.
• Fully annealed AISI 316 Seamless Stainless Steel Tubing to ASTM A 269 or
equivalent. Hardness to be less than RB 80.
• Fittings to be Swagelok AISI 316 Stainless Steel Twin Ferrule Compression
type.

6.7.5 The tubing wall thickness of any larger size tubing shall be suitably rated to meet the
process design pressure to which it is subjected.

6.8 Instrument Electrical Installation:

6.8.1 Electrical Installation requirements shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of
Electrical Design Criteria.

6.8.2 Cable Segregation:

6.8.2.1 Intrinsically safe signal cables may be run on the same tray as the equivalent non LS
Signal cables but must be segregated by a metal barrier.

6.8.2.2 Cables carrying miscellaneous signals such as frequency/plus /analysis shall be


individually and overall screened and be run on separate tray unless individual approval
has been given to share a tray with other signal cables.

7.0 CALIBRATION, INSPECTION AND TESTING:

7.1 Calibration, inspection and testing requirements shall in general be as per clause 3.6.4.7
of Instrumentation Design Criteria. In addition, the following shall also be taken care
of:

7.2 All equipment shall be comprehensively tested before delivery. The testing shall
demonstrate the full functionality of the equipment.

7.3 In addition to the inspection and testing specified in the accompanying equipment
specifications, the Contractor shall also comply with the following minimum
requirements.

7.4 The Contractor shall provide to the Company, not less than six weeks prior to the date
of commencement of the control and instrumentation system test, a detailed schedule of

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 20 of 22

the tests and sample rest record forms for approval. The tests shall not be undertaken
until the test schedule and test forms are approved by the Company.

7.5 The test procedures shall include but not be limited to the following:
• All wiring shall be tested for insulation and the test voltage shall be compatible
with the wiring being tested.(Equipment likely to be damaged shall be
disconnected for these tests).
• Full stimulated function tests of the complete system with all equipment in
position and connected to suitable temporary supplies. The Contractor shall
provide the test stimulator consisting of dummy loads with indication of the
status of every output. The test simulator shall only be connected to the field
connection terminals and the input/output interface shall be individually labeled
to facilitate testing. The Contractor shall obtain Company’s approval of supply
unit characteristics and simulated input/output interface.
• All equipment failure modes e.g. fail-safe, self-diagnostic, power supply dip,
etc. shall be checked.
• Calibration of all instrument items shall be witnessed to ensure the required
accuracy is achieved.

7.6 All tests and corrective work shall be recorded for the Company’s approval.

7.7 The Contractor shall ensure that all inspections and tests are completed satisfactorily.
The Company reserves the right to back-charge any additional inspection work if
Contractor’s preparations are found to be unsatisfactory by the Company.

7.8 Tests shall be witnessed and results recorded on test sheets, which shall include test
reports and be forwarded to the Company for approval and acceptance prior to
shipment.

8.0 DOCUMENTATION:

8.1 The documentation requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.6.2 of


Instrumentation Design Criteria. In addition, the following shall also be taken care of:

8.2 Design Documentation:

8.2.1 The design documentation shall include the following:


• General arrangement drawings complete with parts list, materials of construction
and description. The drawings shall also include package dimensions,
instrument locations, interconnecting piping or tubing tie in points and tubing
termination bulkhead location, and junction boxes location at which all
instrument cables terminated. The instrument drawing symbols shall be in

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 21 of 22

accordance with ISA S 5.1 Instrument tag No. on those drawings shall conform
to tag No.on P&ID drawings.
• A table of all instruments, including pressure gauges, relief valves, control
valves, thermometers, c. used throughout the package. This tabulation shall
show item number, model; number, manufacturer, service, size or range,
specification sheet No., set point and other data which would facilitate
identification and location of the instruments.
• Prices list of recommended commissioning spares.
• Prices list of spare parts for two years operation.
• Prices list of special tools.
• Itemized list of Contractor’s Deviations from Specification.
• Weights.

8.3 Final Documentation:

8.3.1 A manufacturing Record Book shall be compiled concurrently with fabrication such
that a full record of the fabrication, materials, inspection and testing is available.

8.3.2 All items in the manufacturing Record Book shall be numbered. Contents shall include,
but not be limited to the following:
• Front cover sheet detailing.
• Project Title.
• PO No.

9.0 TAGGING AND NAMEPLATES:

9.1 Tagging & Nameplate requirements shall in general be according to clause 3.6.6.1 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

10.0 REVIEW & APPROVAL:

10.1 Review and approval of purchase specifications and other related documents shall in
general be according to clause 3.6.6.3 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

11.0 VENDOR PRE-QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:

11.1 The Vendor pre-qualification requirements shall in general be according to clause


3.6.6.4 of Instrumentation Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Functional Specifications Spec No : 3503
Design Division
For Rev. No : 1
Engg. Services
INSTRUMENTATION FOR Disc: Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2000
PACKAGED EQPT Page : 22 of 22

12.0 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT:

12.1 Preparation for shipment shall in general be as per clause 3.6.6.5 of Instrumentation
Design Criteria.

13.0 RECEIPT & STORAGE:

13.1 Receipt and storage requirements shall in general be as per clause 3.6.6.6 of
Instrumentation Design Criteria.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 1 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT CUM

CONTROL PANEL

TOTAL
PREPARED / REVIEWED
APPROVED BY No. OF DATE REV. No.
REVISED BY BY
PAGES
VS SSK GRP 11 16.06.08 1
AK MC RK 11 10.02.06 0

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 2 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

CONTENTS

Clause No. ITEM Page No.


1.0 Scope of This Document 3
2.0 Scope of Supply 3
3.0 Hydraulic Power Unit Cum Control Panel 5
3.1 Design Criteria 5
3.2 Inspection & testing 8
3.3 Warranty 9
3.4 Spares 9
3.5 Tools 9
3.6 Packing & transport 10
3.7 Documentation 10
3.8 Operation & Maintenance Manual 10

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 3 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This functional specification describes the essential design considerations for
the selection of Hydraulic power Unit Cum Control Panel for the intended
service.
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
2.1 The quantity to be supplied and installed shall be as per the requirements
indicated in the Basic Bid Work, Design Criteria and the P & IDs.
2.2 The vendor shall be responsible for the selection of the Hydraulic Power Unit
Cum Control Panel suitable for its intended application, its procurement,
tagging, packing, testing & calibration, preparation for shipment, along with
accessories, spares, and assistance where required for its installation &
commissioning at site. This FS shall be read in conjunction with:-
1. Instrumentation Design Criteria
2. Basic Bid Work
3. Project P & IDs
4. Process Design Criteria
5. Electrical Design Criteria
6. Mechanical Design Criteria
7. Piping Design Criteria
8. Environmental condition of the project
2.3 The following codes and standards (latest edition) as applicable to be referred

ASME, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code


Sec.VIII,
Div.1
API RP 2A Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and
Construction of Fixed Offshore Platforms
API-RP-14C Analysis, Design, Installation and Testing of Surface
Safety System on Offshore Production Platforms.
API 17A Recommended practice for design and operation of sub-
sea production systems
API 17D Specifications for sub-sea wellhead and Christmas tree
equipment.
API 17E Sub-sea Production Control Umbilical

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 4 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

NAS 1638 Cleanliness Requirements of parts used in Hydraulic


system
SAE J 343 Specifications for tests and procedures for hose and hose
assemblies
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
IEC International Electro technical Commission
ASTM American Society for Testing and Material
API-610 Centrifugal Pumps for General Refinery Services
API-674 Positive Displacement Reciprocating Pumps

API-676 Positive Displacement Pumps- Rotary


2.4 Vendor shall supply all necessary equipment including major items as specified
below but not limited to the following
• Hydraulic pump driven by electric motor
• Hand hydraulic pump as back-up facility
• Hydraulic fluid reservoir with filter, breather etc.
• Hydraulic accumulators with instrumentation
• Solenoid operated control valves
• Manual control valves
• Interconnected piping, electrical, instrumentation and controls
• Necessary connectors, tubing for connecting HPU with Hydraulic
umbilical
• Pressure relief valves, pressure switches, pressure indicators, SS 316
tubing, valves and fittings.
All above equipments, units and components shall be skid mounted on a
common structural skid, fully assembled, piped with inlet and outlet piping
terminated at skid edge with appropriately rated flanges, wired, tested and
painted for manned environment.
Umbilical hoses shall connect HPU to the sub surface intervention valve
actuators through quick disconnect couplings for hydraulic supply to and return
from actuators

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 5 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

3.0 HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT CUM CONTROL PANEL:

3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA:

3.1.1 The control system shall consist of the following major components in a single
skid mounted unit.
• Hydraulic power unit
• Control panel with all control and display instruments.
3.1.2 It shall be possible for the operator to actuate the subsea valves from the panel
(HPU) and to observe the status of the valves. Valve status shall be electrically or
electro-hydraulically transmitted by a separate pair of cable/umbilical chords.
3.1.3 The panel should have provision to accept and respond to ESD & FSD signal
commands from the existing platform ESD/FSD loop. An ESD /FSD signal from
the platform should cause a closure of the subsea shut down valve.
3.1.4 Vendor shall also supply the initial charge of hydraulic control fluid for the entire
system (up to the sub-sea valve) as well as nitrogen cylinders.
3.1.5 An integrated test of the HPU cum control panel, subsea shutdown valve and the
Umbilical shall be carried out by the contractor/vendors
3.1.6 The equipment shall be designed for outdoor location on an offshore platform with
site conditions as detailed in BID package.
3.1.7 The equipment shall be selected as per the area classification requirement.
3.1.8 Hydraulic Power Unit shall be designed for a complete life of 25 years minimum
of the platform as specified elsewhere in the BID. The Hydraulic Power Units shall
operate sub-surface intervention valves located at a distance from platform as per
the enclosed P&IDs and data sheet
3.1.9 The following shall be given due consideration in sizing, selection and design of
various components forming a part of the electric motor driven Hydraulic Power
Unit:-
• Working pressure requirement
• Pressure drops in umbilical
• Ease of operation and maintenance
• Overall compactness

• Reliability of Operation

3.1.10 HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR LINE FITTINGS

3.1.10.1 Hydraulic reservoir shall be of SS 316 construction provided with the


following accessories and fittings as a minimum:-

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 6 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

• Drain point
• Breather screen with desiccant type air filters cum particulate filters
• Level gauge
• Necessary pipe/tubing connections
Hydraulic accumulators shall be in stainless steel 316 constructions with
ASME code stamp and shall be provided with 100% standby capacity. The
Vendor in bid shall describe the make and design and operating conditions of
hydraulic accumulators along with typical drawing. The Vendor shall also
specify the make and material of accumulator bladder and other accessories
suitable for the service and application in bid and describe the operation of
accumulators

3.1.10.2 Pumps shall be driven by electric motor and the Vendor shall furnish full
details of pumps with bid for the technical evaluation.

3.1.10.3 Pump discharge pressure and flow rates shall be decided by the vendor based
on the design and operating conditions required for the operation of sub-sea
valves as per process design criteria and basic scope of work.

3.1.10.4 Hydraulic pipe work in the system shall be done with soft annealed seamless
SS 316 tubes and SS 316 fittings.

3.1.11 FILTERS
Filters at suction to pump shall be provided to provide 5 microns degree or
better of filtration for the safety of the pump. Filter housing shall be in
stainless steel construction with suitable vent and drain connections.

3.1.12 HYDRAULLIC CONTROL FLUID


Hydraulic control fluid shall be Marston Bentley (HW560, Isaac Bentley make
or equivalent and shall meet the following requirements as a minimum.
• The fluid shall be water based, consisting of de-ionized water, biocide and
water-soluble lubricant.
• Viscosity shall be less than 4 Centistokes at +200 C
• The fluid shall contain a corrosion inhibitor and shall be compatible with
the material and seals used in the system.
• The fluid shall be free from foaming. The fluid shall be thermally stable
(i.e. stratification or precipitation shall not occur over a temperature range
of -50 C to +650 C at pressure of 0-5000 psi.
• The fluid shall not form harmful products when exposed to oil, gas, water,
completion fluid and greases or thread sealants employed in equipment

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 7 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

manufacture. The fluid should be miscible with unto a minimum of 10%


sea-water.
• The fluid shall be resistant to deterioration by oxidation.
• The fluid shall include biocide to control any biological growth. Vendor
shall state any limitations on its useful life and recommended action to
maintain the required protection.
• The fluid shall meet NAS 1638 Class 6 standard of cleanliness.
• Vendor shall provide procedures for laboratory tests for fluid quality.
• Vendor shall furnish the Test data for fluid pH, viscosity, specific gravity,
water content, pour point and cleanliness.
• The fluid shall not cause deterioration of the materials and seals in the
system.

3.1.13 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

3.1.13.1 Vendor shall furnish with the bid detailed P&ID, system description and bill of
material for the Hydraulic Power Unit.

3.1.13.2 HPU requirement shall be compatible with overall operation and control
philosophy of platform. However, following facilities shall be necessarily
included.

3.1.13.3 Reservoir capacity shall take into account the distances traversed by umbilical
and the type of actuator. Reservoir should have at least 30% reserve capacity
for leakages etc, capacity calculations shall be as per design criteria and
company approval shall be obtained.

3.1.13.4 Hydraulic system shall be capable of withstanding a proof test pressure that is
1.5 times the operating pressure.

3.1.13.5 Hydraulic reservoir shall be complete with breather valve, level gauge,
level switch, drain connection and access opening for inspection and cleaning
of reservoir..

3.1.13.6 The selection, fabrication and installation of piping work shall meet the
minimum requirements defined in the piping specification.

3.1.13.7 Electrical equipment and materials shall be in accordance with the attached
electrical functional specification and electrical design criteria.

3.1.13.8 All equipment selected for hazardous area shall be certified by BASEEFA, UL
or equivalent international testing, agency for the service and area in which it is
to be used

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 8 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

3.1.13.9 The selection and installation of instrumentation works shall meet the
minimum requirements defined in the instrument design criteria and functional
specification. The material exposed to the sour service shall meet the NACE-
MR-01-75 standard (latest edition).

3.1.14 SKID

3.1.14.1 The skid shall be designed and built to ensure that all the equipment along with
accessories, panel and piping are mounted suitably for convenient operation.

3.1.14.2 A canopy shall be provided above the skid for protection against rain and direct
sun light.

3.1.14.3 The skid mounted unit will be equipped with lifts slots in the slid base. And the
upper from will be equipped with a lifting eye on each of the top four corners.

3.1.14.4 The lift points and skid structures will be designed to withstand four times the
unit’s static weight, in the event of snatch lifts. The skid structure shall be
sandblasted, primed and painted as per the bid requirements.

3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING:

3.2.1 Vendor shall carryout various tests as per applicable Codes/Standards. Test
certificates shall be submitted for Company’s approval.
3.2.2 Company/its authorized representative or certifying agency shall have access to
inspect the equipment at any stage during manufacture. Company shall specify
hold points/witness points while approving purchase specification during project
execution. During inspection, material certificates, shop test data, certificates for
bought out components and other relevant information shall be furnished for
company’s perusal so as to ascertain that the specifications and quality are
complied with.
3.2.3 In case Vendor/their sub vendors of equipments/packages have in-house elaborate
Quality/Assurance Systems (operating in their shop) for Inspection & Testing of
equipments/packages shall obtain approval of their Quality Assurance System from
the Company prior to commencement of manufacturing activities.
Where such Quality Assurance System is not in operation with the
manufacturer/their sub-vendors, the Tests specified as “witnessed” in the
Specification shall be carried out in presence of the Company/as authorized
representative or certifying agency. The cost of preparation for shop testing of
equipments/packages including inspection fee etc. shall be borne by the
Contractor. Vendor/Contractor shall give minimum 15 days prior intimation to the
Company regarding testing schedules.
Company/its authorized representative or certifying agency shall have access to
inspect the equipment at any stage during manufacturer. During inspection,

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 9 of 11
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL

material certificates, shop test data, certificates for bought out components and
other relevant information shall be furnished for company’s perusal so as to
ascertain that the specifications and quality are complied with. Company shall
specify hold points/witness points while approving purchase specification during
project execution

3.3 WARRANTY

Vendor shall have final and total responsibility for the design and mechanical
performance of all equipment supplied under this specification. Vendor shall
warrant the equipment furnished by him and the performance of the said
equipment in accordance with this specification. Also refer to Warranty clause as
given in bidding documents (Volume I).

3.4 SPARES

3.4.1 Vendor shall recommend and provide list of spare parts needed for startup and
commissioning in purchase specification. In addition, vendor shall also furnish a
separate itemized priced list of recommended spares for one (1) year normal
operation and maintenance. Recommended spares should take into account related
factors of equipment reliability, effect of downtime upon production or safety, cost
of parts and availability of equipment service facilities.
3.4.2 All spare parts furnished by Vendor should be wrapped and packaged so that they
will be preserved in original as-new condition under the normal conditions of
storage to be anticipated in India and shall be properly tagged and codes so that
later identification as to intended equipment usage will be facilitated. They shall
be packaged separately clearly marked as “Spare Parts” and shipped at the same
time as the equipment. Packing lists shall be furnished so that the parts can be
handled without uncrating, if desired start-up spares shall be packed and identified
separately

3.5 TOOLS

Vendor shall provide two sets of special tools, if not stated elsewhere, for operation
and maintenance of the furnished equipment.

3.6 PACKING AND TRANSPORT

The offered equipment along with their accessories shall be shipped packed in
wooden crates. They shall be wrapped with polythene sheets, before being placed
in the crates to prevent damage to finish. Crates shall have skid bottom for
handling.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 10 of
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL 11

3.7 DOCUMENTATION

Installation and commissioning procedures for HPU unit and control system. These
shall be submitted to the company for review at least 60 days before the start of
said activities. These shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following.
• Procedure for installation and interconnection of surface elements of the
system.
• Final cleaning and flushing procedures for control system components.
• Pressure leak test procedures for the hydraulic circuit
• Final check out of the surface equipment prior to connection to the
umbilical.
• Check out of the subsea and surface electrical system
• Procedure for tie-up procedure of umbilical to surface equipments.
• Sequence and functional testing of entire subsea system
• Procedure for removal and reinstallation of subsea connection before and
after work over and wire line jobs, including safety procedures.
• Procedures should also include (where-ever applicable) The required test
sheets indicating clearly the activities /tests tube carried out and acceptance
criteria for each of the tests conducted during installation. Pre-commission
ing and commissioning.

3.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.8.1 The contractor shall prepare on operation and maintenance manual for all the
equipment (provided by contractor) and submit to company representative within
10 days subsequent to fabrication completion. This manual shall systematically
include all information on the system equipment. Its installation, operation and
maintenance. In particular, the following information shall be covered where- ever
applicable:
• Component / equipment system description should explain the design
criteria, functional description and mode of operation and start-up and
shut down procedures including logic flow charts
• Checks and test program and procedure for individual sub assembly
level tests and for final tests upon completion.
• Operating instructions during normal operations
• Operating instructions during failure conditions
• Description of monitoring control and safety system
• Fault finding procedures
• Procedure for periodic performance tests
• Maintenance and repair procedures
• Safety precautions and safe practices
• Drawings and equipment schedules

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
Design Division Spec # 3506
Functional Specifications
Engineering Services Rev # 1
11 - High, Mumbai HYDRAULIC POWER Discipline Instt.
UNIT CUM CONTROL Page # 11 of
ISO 9001: 2000 PANEL 11

3.8.2 The maintenance manual shall include the following attachment where
applicable:-
• Drawings showing supporting structure, pressure drawing(s) showing
piping system, value and instrumentation (P&IDs).
• Drawing showing individual component details. Drawing showing the
de tails of each subassembly and assembly.
• Drawing showing controls and safety systems.
• Flow diagrams and schematics.
• Equipment vendor data.
• Instrument list.
• Blank test sheets for all the tests.
• Drawings for electrical system.
• Drawings and description of test equipment and tools
• Recommended parameters for routine system monitoring
• Equipment and instruments parts list.
• List of tools and test equipments.
• As built drawings, inspection and test reports, operation manual and
other relevant documents shall be submitted to the company in hard
copies and as well as in CD ROM.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
DD/SOF/004A/B DD/SOP/008 TO 015 02 01 01/08/2006
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 2 OF 11

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Clause
ITEM Page No.
No.

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT 3

2.0 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS 3

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 3

4.0 BULK ITEM REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERFACING 3

Instrument air Headers, Branch lines &


4.1 3
Distribution.

4.2 Instrument Air Fittings 4

4.3 Instrument Air Tubing 6

4.4 Piping Support 8

4.5 Junction boxes 9

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 3 OF 11

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


1.1 This specification describes the essential considerations in the selection, installation, testing and
commissioning of the instrumentation Bulk Materials like tubing, fitting, instrument valves (
Miniature Valves / Instrument isolation valves ) & Junction Box.
1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the Bulk Materials suitable for its
intended application, its procurement, testing, packing, shipment to site, installation and
commissioning.
1.3 This Functional specification covers a wide variety of requirements as mentioned in above
mentioned clauses. However, Contractor is required to submit purchase specifications for
Instrumentation Tubing & Fittings for company’s review & approval.
2.0 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS:
a) Specification No. 3.6: Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
c) Project P & IDs
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 Installation materials for instrumentation items shall be as per actuals. Bidder shall submit
detailed hookup drawings for each instrument installation with MOC and Quantities mentioned
therein.
4.0 BULK ITEM REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERFACING:
4.1 INSTRUMENT AIR HEADERS, BRANCH LINES AND DISTRIBUTION.
i) Instrument air/gas header shall be in accordance with the piping specification of
appropriate service and operation rating as per the piping PMS.
ii) The size of instrument air/gas mains shall be established in accordance with the table
below unless otherwise specified. Connections shall be as per the Annexure IV of the
Design Criteria
Nom. Pipe Size Max. Members of Users
½” 3
¾” 14
1” 23
1½” 50
2” 100
iii) All take-off for branch lines shall be of SS 316 & shall be from the top of the main
header with SS 316 block valves (full bore ball valves) equal in size to the branch line.
All low points shall have a ½” valve SS 316 (full bore ball valves) installed as a drain and
blow down point.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 4 OF 11

iv) The branches to individual pneumatic instruments shall be as per the Hook-up drawing
provided in Annexure IV of Design Criteria.
v) Every pneumatic instrument requiring instrument air / instrument gas shall be provided
with appropriate volume 316 SS filter regulator fitted with integral relief valve and output
gauge to ensure that suitable quality and pressure of air is received by the instrument.
vi) Wherever the air / gas sub header ends in a distribution manifold, each manifold take-off
valve shall supply only one user and shall be labeled with the user’s tag number. At least
one spare outlets fitted with valves (full bore ball valves) shall be provided for every 20
meters of the distribution manifold, for future use. The total number of spares for future
shall be minimum 20% of the total number of Outlets.
vii) Manufacturer or fabricator supplying equipment or vessels mounted on skids, which
incorporate instrumentation requiring pneumatic supply, shall install a pneumatic supply
header, of proper size, on the skid with end connection at skid battery limit. All
pneumatic instruments mounted on skid shall be fed with pneumatic supply from this
header. The non-skid supply piping shall terminate at skid boundary and the location and
size of the supply connection shall be noted on vendor approval drawings.
viii) Where the process gas is used instead of instrument air, MOC selected shall be NACE
compliant SS316L for the service and composition of the gas, i.e., sour service, H2S,
CO2 etc.
4.2 INSTRUMENT AIR FITTINGS:
4.2.1 Material, Specifications & Sizes:
a) All fittings shall be imperial sizes, expressed in nominal outside diameter (OD) and all
threads shall be NPT. All threaded fittings shall have NPT threads as per ANSI B1.20.1
b) Fittings shall be of 316 SS material to ASTM A 276 or equivalent (i.e., BS 970-316-S31,
DIN4401 or ASME SA 479-316).
c) Stainless Steel Tube Fittings made from bar stock (straight configurations) should meet
ASTM A276/ ASME SA479 standards and those made from forgings (including elbows,
crosses and tees) should meet ASTM A182 / ASME SA182, BS 970-316-S31, DIN 4401
standards.
4.2.2 Fittings shall be ASTM F1387 MAF classification – IV , “Flare-less Mechanical collating grip
type” producing a firm grip on the tube without substantially reducing the tube wall thickness.
Fittings shall be capable of holding the maximum working pressure of the tubing without any
leak after only one and a quarter turn pull up of the nut.
4.2.3 Fittings shall have the body, front & back ferrules and nuts. All the components of tube fittings
shall be from of the same manufacturer.
4.2.4 Nuts for SS fittings shall have silver plated threads to act as a lubricating agent to avoid galling
and to reduce tightening torque.
4.2.5 All fittings shall have hardness not exceeding RB 90. All the fittings end connections shall be
compatible to tube of hardness in the range between RB 70 to 79 and hardness for fittings

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 5 OF 11

(ferrules) shall be such that, there is a minimum hardness difference of 5 to 10 between tube and
fittings for better sealing.
4.2.6 Bar stock shall be with carbon content <0.05% to provide increased resistance to corrosion.
4.2.7 Heat code traceability number shall be stamped or etched on both body and nut of fittings.
4.2.8 Threaded connections shall be NPT for all components and piping and tubing systems for
process and utilities connections. PTFE threads sealant shall be used on all threaded connections.
For high temperature application suitable sealant shall be selected.
4.2.9 Above API 10000 and above company’ approval shall be obtained for selection of Fittings.
4.2.10 Testing Requirements for tube fittings:
4.2.10.1 Type Testing Requirements:
a. The tests specified in the table below shall be carried out on the samples drawn and in the
sequence, as specified in ASTM F1387–99 (Re-approved 2005). The testing shall consist
of all the following tests as per ASTM F1387–99 (Re-approved 2005):
Mandatory Tests
1 Examination of specimen Annexure A2
2 Pneumatic Proof Test Annexure A3
3 Hydrostatic Proof Test Annexure A4
4 Impulse Test Annexure A5
5 Flexure Fatigue Test Annexure A6
6 Tensile Test Annexure A7
7 Hydrostatic Burst Test Annexure A8
8 Repeated Assembly Test Annexure A9
9 Rotary Flex Test Annexure A10
Supplementary Tests
1 Thermal Cycling Test Section S2
2 Stress Corrosion Test Section S4
3 Vibration Test Section S8
(MOC of Tubing used in
Sizes to be tested: ¼”, ½” 3/8”, 3/4” 1”
testing shall be SS316 as a minimum).

Valid Type Test Report from Accredited Lab/ National Test House for all the above tests
and sizes (as mentioned above in the table) carried out as per ASTM F-1387 (2005
Reapproved) shall be submitted along with the Purchase specification.

4.2.10.2 Following Tests shall be witnessed by TPIA for the lot of supply and report shall be
submitted, along with supply.
• Visual Inspection, Dimensional Check, Heat Code Traceability certificate Review,
Material Test Certificate Review & check for workmanship.
• Positive Material Identification

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 6 OF 11

• Reviews of certificate for Oxalic Etch Testing for inter granular corrosion resistance.
(ASTM A 262).
• Hydrostatic Pressure test
• Pneumatic Proof Test
4.3 INSTRUMENT AIR TUBING
4.3.1 Material, Specifications & Sizes:
• All tubing shall be imperial sizes, expressed in nominal outside diameter (OD) and all
threads shall be NPT ANSIB1.20.1.
• ‘Tubing’ shall be of TP 316 / 316L (dual certified) material to ASTM ‘A 269’ or
equivalent (i.e., BS 970-316-S31, DIN4401 or ASME SA 479-316), unless otherwise
specified. Molybdenum content shall be 2.5% minimum and carbon content of ≤
0.03%.The minimum size shall be ¼” OD.
• Manufacturing Process: Extrusion followed by cold Pilgering and / or cold drawing .
• Tolerance on OD : +/- 0.08 mm (As Per EN10305-1/DIN 2391)
• Tolerance on wall thickness : +/- 10% (As Per EN10305-1/DIN 2391)
• Pressure Rating: Shall be minimum 250 bar.
• Roughness value on OD: 1.2 Micron RA (max.)
• Concentricity : As per EN 10305(≤0.1)
• Tube Hardness : Up to 80 HRB As per NACE MR 0175 Certification
• Tubing Length : 4-6 meters
4.3.2 The manufacturer shall provide material compliance certificates confirming that the raw material
for fittings conform to ASME section – II.
4.3.3 Fully Bright Annealed Tubes: Tubes shall be annealed in a controlled reducing atmosphere to
ensure a clean oxide-free film on the free surface for reduced chances of corrosion.
4.3.4 Stainless steel tubing shall be soft annealed seamless TP 316 / 316L (dual certified) as per
ASTM A269. Sizes shall be as follows:
S. No. Application Size
¼”O.D. X 0.035” W.T.
1 High-pressure hydraulic lines
3/8” O.D. X 0.049” W.T.
2 ESD/FSD loop 3/8” O.D. X 0.035” W.T.
Pneumatic supply to shutdown valves 1/2” O.D X 0.065” W.T. 316 SS tube ,
3
, control valves 3/8” O.D. X 0.035” W.T. 316 SS tube
4 Process impulse lines 1/2” O.D X 0.065” W.T. 316 SS tube

4.3.5 Signal transmission shall be through ¼” O.D. X 0.035” W.T. tubing run singly or in bundles.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 7 OF 11

4.3.6 Monel tubing shall be used on sea water and produced water service and shall be fully annealed
seamless as per ASTM B-165 with size ½” O.D. X 0.035” W.T.
4.3.7 Tubing shall be supported and protected by stainless steel angle / channel or ladder / tray along
the complete length of each run and shall be fastened with stainless steel saddles at a maximum
of 1 m intervals on straight runs.
4.3.8 Channel or tray support for tubing runs shall be sized for a minimum capacity of 30% greater
than that required.
4.3.9 All pneumatic exhaust ports and breathers shall be fitted with bug screens, installed facing
downwards.
4.3.10 Vendor to confirm that following tests shall be carried out by vendor and certificates for the
same shall be given along with supply. Test reports submitted by Vendor shall be reviewed by
TPIA at the time of Supply.
• Visual Inspection, Dimensional Check, Check for workmanship. Material Test Certificate
• Mechanical test : Tensile test (Yield strength, Tensile strength, % Elongation) , Impact
test
• Hardness test
• Chemical test (Product analysis)
• Microstructure examination : Ferrite content, Sigma phase
• IGC test (Austenitic): As per ASTM A 262 specification ,Practice E
• Corrosion test
• Eddy current test: 100% Eddy Current Test acc to ASTM 1016 A/ ASTM A450
• Burst Test: Tube shall be subjected to 'Tube Burst Test' to evaluate the grip of tube
fittings on tubing at the burst pressure of the tubing. LSTK contractor shall get this test
carried out at the manufacturer’s place and submit the test report along with Purchase
Specification.
• Flattening Test
• Heat Number Traceability certificate shall be ensured for above mentioned tests and shall
be reviewed by the TPIA.
4.3.11 Tubing Installation:
a) The primary instrument block valves for all instruments shall be as per piping
specifications. MOC of all the drain valves shall be 316 SS / MONEL as a minimum.
b) All impulse lines shall be run with a slope not less than 1 in 12 except where otherwise
specified. Direction of slope is to be downward from the process for liquid service and
upward from the process for gas service.
c) Tubing shall be joined by double compression fittings.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 8 OF 11

d) Instrument lines shall be run in the vertical plane as far as possible and shall be run with
the minimum number of changes of directions consistent with good practice and neat
appearance. All pipe and tubing shall be run in horizontal and vertical planes only.
e) Tubing shall be bent with correct size tubing bender where required to avoid the use of
fittings. Tubing cutter shall always be used to cut tubing. The use of short lengths of
tubing in long runs shall be avoided, to avoid the use of fittings.
f) All tubing shall be run in such a manner as to give the maximum protection against
mechanical damage. Tubing runs shall be grouped together and clamped where possible.
Tubing shall be arranged so that couplings can be tightened without distorting lines.
Instrument tubing shall not run on trays intended for cables and shall not share the same
transit with cables.
g) Where tubing is run in permanent enclosures, the Contractor shall ensure that entry and
exit of such enclosures is clean and smooth.
h) Pipes or tubes installed but not connected, shall have the ends closed in approved fashion
to prevent the entry of foreign material by suitable caps or plugs.
i) All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign material entering tubing /
pipelines before and during erection.
j) No pipe or tube shall be left with mechanical strain on it.
k) Where the length of transmission tubing exceeds 60 Mtrs. (200 Ft.) the Company should
be consulted as to the necessary of installing signal booster relays.
l) Where permanent enclosures are left with space for instrument tubing to be pulled in at
some future date, a galvanized pull wire of adequate size shall be left in the tray.
m) On tubing to pipe connections and in making of screwed pipe joints, Teflon tape shall be
applied to make thread in a manner to insure tape is not over the end of the male fittings.
4.4 Piping Supports:
a) Piping and tubing shall be adequately supported and fixed at distances not exceeding
those in the following table:
Single Tubing Max. Distance Between Supports
3
/8” O.D. and less Continuous
½” to ¾” Nom. Size 2 Mtrs. (6 ft.)
¾” to 1” Nom. Size 3 Mtrs. (9ft.)
Multi tube Bundles 3 Mtrs. (9ft.)
b) All field-mounted instrument air tubing shall be supported with galvanized steel angles or
channels of minimum 1/8” thickness fabricated to present a neat appearance.
c) All instrument tubing supports shall be galvanized prior to installation.
d) Mechanical ferrule seater shall be used on tubing for pressure 140 kg/cm2 (2000 psi) and
above.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 9 OF 11

e) Pipe bushing shall not be used. Plugs shall be of bar-stock with hex heads.
f) If extended lengths of multiple tubing are to be run, multiple bundles and junction boxes
with weatherproof entries may be used to the best advantage.
g) Manufacturer or fabricator supplying skid mounted equipments or vessels with
instrumentation, which provides, or utilizes pneumatic, offside alarms, shutdowns, or
control functions shall tube signals to a central bulkhead, near skid boundary, available
for hook up by the Contractor for connection to offside equipment. Location of the
bulkhead shall be noted on vendor drawings.
h) Differential or static pressure sensing lines shall not exceed 6 Mtrs. (20 Feet) for direct
connected or locally mounted instruments.
4.5 JUNCTION BOXES:
a) Instrument junction boxes shall be certified for use in the hazardous area in which they
are installed. For intrinsically safe circuits, boxes certified Increased Safety Ex e shall be
used. For non-intrinsically safe circuits, boxes certified Explosion Proof / Flame proof
Ex d shall be used. Boxes (Ex e, Ex d) shall have minimum IP 66 ingress protection.
b) Separate junction boxes shall be used for intrinsically safe wiring. Junction boxes in any
cable path from field to control room shall be limited to one only unless otherwise
mentioned in Basic scope of work related to instrumentation. Instrument junction boxes
shall not be used for electrical power cables
c) For Ex d junction boxes cable entries shall have NPT threads; Where this is not possible a
certified 316 SS adaptor shall be fitted.
d) All Ex e and Ex d enclosures shall have all spare entries sealed with suitably certified 316
SS plugs.
e) Entries shall be suitably spaced to enable ease of installation of cable glands. Tapped
cable entries shall be of good quality, without stripped or damaged threads. The thread
shall be continuous and shall permit the cable gland to fit squarely against the gland plate
(or enclosure).
f) Where the gland plate is not thick enough for tapping, cable glands shall be fitted with
double locknuts.
g) The threads of all cable glands and adaptors shall be greased on assembly.
h) Cable glands fitted to all Ex e enclosures, and industrial enclosures, may have a nylon or
lead sealing washer between the Cable Gland and Gland Plate (or enclosure) to ensure IP
66 protection. Sealing washers shall not be fitted to glands entering Ex d enclosures.
i) All glands, adaptors, reducers and plugs for the Ex e as well as Ex d junction boxes shall
be certified for use in Class I .
j) All junction boxes shall be effectively sealed, once uncrated or fitted into position. All
lids shall be replaced during any break in work. Where this is impractical, e.g. large
multi-cable junction boxes, a heavy PVC sheet shall be used to cover the junction box to
exclude rain and dust.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 10 OF 11

k) All terminals (including unused terminals) shall be tightened down. For communing of
terminals, feed through cross connection bar shall be used. Comb connectors shall not be
used.
The construction of junction boxes shall be as under:
a) Increased Safety
i. Junction box construction shall be 1.5 mm 316 SS. Boxes shall be bottom entry with a
removable 316 SS gland plate. The gland plate shall be drilled and tapped, 6 mm thick
for tapered threads and 3 mm thick for parallel threads. The plate shall be bolted to the
box with 316 SS bolts, sealed with a neoprene gasket and fitted with an 8 mm earthing
stud. All incoming cables shall enter from the sides of the junction box. Outgoing cable
shall be from the bottom of the junction box.
ii. Boxes shall have four external mounting lugs, two top and bottom, drilled with 10 mm
fixing holes. A full size removable stainless steel gear plate shall be fitted inside each
box. Terminals shall be Ex e rail-mounted tunnel-type made of melamine. Wiring ducts
shall be colored blue.
iii. Boxes shall have doors hinged minimum at two points with a neoprene seal fitted all
round. Hinges shall be the lift-off pintle type, constructed of stainless steel; piano hinges
are not acceptable. A restraining mechanism shall prevent opening more that 160o.
Screwdriver-operated door latches shall be fitted at the top and bottom.
iv. In addition to the manufacturer’s certification label, each junction box shall have
identification label attached to the box with 316 SS screws in a manner which will not
invalidate the hazardous area certification. The label shall be constructed of white-black-
white laminated plastic. The label shall include an engraved Tag No. An additional tag
stating “Intrinsically Safe Circuits” shall be installed. This shall be blue-white-blue
laminated plastic.
v. The contents of Ex e enclosure shall not be altered without the prior approval of the
company‘s electrical or instrumentation engineer .
vi. The damaged terminals shall be replaced with approved Ex e terminals
b) Explosion Proof
i. Explosion proof junction boxes shall be constructed from 316 SS / epoxy coated copper
free die-cast Aluminium. Boxes shall have at least four external mounting lugs, drilled
with 10 mm fixing holes, and an 8 mm external earth lug. A full size removable stainless
steel gear plate shall be fitted inside each box. Cables shall enter from the bottom, and
20% spare entries shall be provided. Cable entries shall be drilled and tapped to suit the
required glands, and fitted with certified 316 SS plugs. Junction box lids shall have cast
hinges integral to the box with stainless steel pins.
ii. Each junction box shall have an identification label, in addition the manufacturer’s
certification label, attached with 316 SS screws in a manner, which will not invalidate the
hazardous area certification. The label shall be constructed of white-black-white
laminated plastic. Terminals shall be rail-mounted tunnel-type, made of melamine.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
FUNCTIONAL Spec. No. 3507
Offshore Design Section Rev. No. 02
SPECIFICATION FOR
Engineering Services Discipline Instrumentation
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION BULK
MATERIALS Page: 11 OF 11

iii. Ex d enclosures shall not be drilled or machined under any circumstances after approval
from the company.
iv. Damaged enclosures shall be completely replaced. Flange surfaces shall be clean and
undamaged .All fixing bolts shall be present and tightened to the correct torque
v. All metal flanges and box lids shall be sealed after assembly with a grease-impregnated
cloth.

Note: Company approval shall be obtained for the use of Aluminium for any instrument
component. Aluminium may only be used if no other suitable material is available but
shall not be used for any component in contact with the process fluid. If Aluminium is
used for any housing or other component, it shall be suitably coated and certified as
copper free i.e. less than 0.4% copper by mass

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3508
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 2
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES Page: 2 OF 14

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause # DESCRIPTION Page No.

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT 3

2.0 CODES & STANDARDS 3

3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 3

4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4

5.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 4

5.1 General 4

5.2 Cable Types 5

5.3 Conductor 7

5.4 Conductor Insulation 7

5.5 Bedding and Inner Sheath 8

5.6 Braiding and Armoring 8

5.7 Outer Sheath 8

5.8 Color Coding 8

5.9 Bending Radius 9

5.10 Cable Drums 9

5.11 Cable lengths and Tolerances 10

5.12 Cable Glands 10

5.13 Cable Shrouds 10

6.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION 10

7.0 CERTIFICATION 12

8.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 12

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3508
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 2
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES Page: 3 OF 14

1.0 SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT:


This Specification defines the minimum requirements for design, manufacture, supply
and testing of Instrumentation Cables with cable glands / accessories for installation on
the offshore process / well platforms.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS:
2.1 Reference Specifications:
a) Instrumentation Design Criteria
b) Basic Bid Work
2.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the scope of work is executed with all mandatory and
statutory Indian requirements.
All cables, accessories and other components supplied, shall comply with the latest
revisions of the applicable codes and standards.
a) B I S [Bureau of Indian Standards]
b) IEC [International Electro technical Commission].
c) NEMA [National Electrical Manufacturers Association].
d) NEC [National Electrical Code]
e) IEEE [Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers].
f) API [American Petroleum Institute].
g) Any other recognized International code or standard may be used in lieu of above,
subject to approval of company.
3.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
3.1 Quantity of the Cables for instrumentation works shall be based on the actual
requirements for cable laying, looping, terminations etc., and shall include ‘spare’ length
for exigencies during installation / commissioning.
The Scope for supply of Cables includes the following items:
a) Flame retardant, low smoke, zero halogen, heat and oil resistant low voltage cables.
(Instrumentation Cables - Signal, Alarm, Digital, Thermocouple extension, etc., and
Power Cables for Instrumentation power requirements)
b) Flame retardant and Fire resistant, low smoke, zero halogen, mica glass tape
insulated, heat and oil resistant low voltage cables. (Cables for: F&G systems, ESD
systems, Safety related & for Critical Control, Power and Shut Down applications).
c) Cable glands and Cable accessories
d) Termination Accessories / Connectors where specified.

FORMAT No. Ref. PROCEDURE No. ISSUE No. REV. No. REV. DATE:
ODS/SOF/004 ODS/SOP/023 01 00 21.07.2010
Spec. No. 3508
Offshore Design Section FUNCTIONAL
Rev. No. 2
Engineering Services SPECIFICATION FOR
Discipline Instt
ISO – 9001:2008 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES Page: 4 OF 14

3.2 Vendor shall submit detailed Specifications for Company’s approvals, with type of
Cables and Quantities mentioned therein.
4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
4.1 Safety